TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION
.............................................................3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
...............................9
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
...............................81
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
................................... 181
5
STARTING AND OPERATING
.................................................271
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
...............................................349
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
...............................................367
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
..................................................419
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
..........................................427
10
INDEX
....................................................................437
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
INTRODUCTION
This manual has been prepared with the assistance of
service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with
the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle. It is
supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and
various customer oriented documents. You are urged to
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc-
tions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored
in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with
the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will be
aware of all safety warnings.
When it comes to service, remember that your dealer
knows your vehicle best, has the factory-trained techni-
cians and genuine Mopart parts, and is interested in
your satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the table of contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
The detailed index, at the rear of this manual, contains a
complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this owner manual:
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION 5
1
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This manual contains WARNINGS against operating
procedures, which could result in an accident or bodily
injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures,
which could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do
not read this entire manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through
the windshield. This number also appears on the Auto-
mobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window
on your vehicle, the vehicle registration and title.
NOTE: It is illegal to remove the VIN.
VIN Location
6 INTRODUCTION
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or
death.
INTRODUCTION 7
1
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
m A Word About Your Keys ..................12
▫ Ignition Key Removal ...................12
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder ................14
▫ Locking Doors With The Key ..............14
m Steering Wheel Lock — If Equipped ..........14
▫ If You Wish To Manually Lock The Steering
Wheel ..............................14
▫ To Release The Steering Wheel Lock .........14
▫ Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System . .15
m Sentry Key — If Equipped .................15
▫ Replacement Keys ......................16
▫ Customer Key Programming ..............17
▫ General Information ....................18
m Security Alarm System — If Equipped .........18
▫ Rearming Of The System — If Equipped ......18
▫ To Arm The System .....................18
▫ To Disarm The System ...................19
▫ Security System Manual Override ...........19
2
m Illuminated Entry System ..................20
m Remote Keyless Entry .....................20
▫ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate ..........21
▫ To Lock The Doors And Liftgate ............22
▫ To Open/Close Power Liftgate — If Equipped . .23
▫ Flash Lights On Lock/Unlock .............23
▫ Using The Panic Alarm ..................24
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters ........24
▫ Battery Replacement ....................24
m Door Locks ............................26
▫ Manual Door Locks .....................26
▫ Power Door Locks .....................27
▫ Child Protection Door Lock ...............30
m Windows .............................32
▫ Power Windows .......................32
m Liftgate ...............................34
▫ Power Liftgate — If Equipped .............35
m Occupant Restraints ......................38
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts .....................39
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure .....45
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners ...................47
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert) ...........................47
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women ............48
▫ Automatic-Locking Retractor (ALR) .........49
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women ............49
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Seat Belt Extender ......................49
▫ Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint System - Airbag ................50
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) ...............65
▫ Child Restraint ........................67
m Engine Break-In Recommendations ...........77
m Safety Tips ............................78
▫ Exhaust Gas ..........................78
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle ..............................79
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle ....................80
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
2
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
The dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key
code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers can
be used to order duplicate keys from your dealer. Ask
your dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe
place.
Ignition Key Removal
Automatic Transaxle
Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the ignition switch to
the ACC position, push the key and cylinder inward,
rotate the key to the LOCK position, and remove the key.
Three Button Key
Ignition Key Positions
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If you try to remove the key before you place the
lever in PARK, the key may become trapped temporarily
in the ignition cylinder. If this occurs, rotate the key to the
right slightly, then remove the key as described. If a
malfunction occurs, the system will trap the key in the
ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is
inoperable. The engine can be started and stopped but
the key cannot be removed until you obtain service.
NOTE: The power window switches, radio, power
outlets, and removable console (if equipped), will remain
active for up to 45 seconds after the ignition switch has
been turned off. Opening a vehicle front door will cancel
this feature.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in the
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove key from the ignition and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
2
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
A chime will sound (reminding you to remove the key)
when the driver’s door opens and the key is in the ’OFF’
or ’ACC’ positions. The chime will not sound with the
key in the ’ON’ position.
Locking Doors With The Key
You can insert the key with either side up. To lock the
door, turn the key rearward, to unlock the door, turn the
key forward. See Section 7 of this manual for door lock
lubrication.
STEERING WHEEL LOCK — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a passive steering
wheel lock. This lock prevents steering the vehicle with-
out the ignition key. If the steering wheel is moved no
more than 1/2 turn in either direction and the key is not
in the ignition switch, the steering wheel will lock.
If You Wish To Manually Lock The Steering
Wheel:
With the engine running, turn the steering wheel upside
down, turn off the engine and remove the key. Turn the
steering wheel slightly in either direction until the lock
engages.
To Release The Steering Wheel Lock:
Insert the key in the ignition switch and start the engine.
If the key is difficult to turn, move the wheel slightly to
the right or left to disengage the lock.
NOTE: If you turned the wheel to the right to engage
the lock, you must turn the wheel slightly to the right to
disengage it. If you turned the wheel to the left to engage
the lock, turn the wheel slightly to the left to disengage it.
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System
This system prevents the key from being removed unless
the shift lever is in PARK. It also prevents shifting out of
PARK unless the key is in the ACC, or ON positions, and
the brake pedal is depressed.
SENTRY KEY — IF EQUIPPED
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unautho-
rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses ignition keys, which have an embedded
electronic chip (transponder), to prevent unauthorized
vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are pro-
grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two (2)
seconds if someone uses an invalid key to start the
engine.
NOTE: A key, which has not been programmed, is also
considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the
ignition lock cylinder for that vehicle.
During normal operation, after turning on the ignition
switch, the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will
turn on for three (3) seconds for a bulb check. If the light
remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is
a problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light
begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that
someone used an invalid key to start the engine. Either of
these conditions will result in the engine being shut off
after two (2) seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light turns on
during normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for
longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in
the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle ser-
viced as soon as possible.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
2
NOTE:
•
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compatible
with remote starting systems. Use of these systems
may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of
security protection.
•
Exxon/Mobil Speed Pass,™ additional Sentry Keys, or
any other transponder equipped components on the
same keychain will not cause a key-related (transpon-
der) fault unless the additional part is physically held
against the ignition key being used when starting the
vehicle. Cell phones, pagers, or other RF electronics
will not cause interference with this system.
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once
a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle, it can
not be programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
Always remove Sentry Keys from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four digit PIN number. This number is required
for dealer replacement of keys. Duplication of keys may
be performed at an authorized dealer or by using the
Customer Key Programming procedure. This procedure
consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key is one which has never been
programmed and needs to be cut.
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer
System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to the
dealer.
Customer Key Programming
You can program new sentry keys to the system if you
have two valid sentry keys by performing the following
procedure:
1. Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank(s) to
match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.
2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch and
turn the ignition switch ON for at least 3 seconds but no
longer than 15 seconds. Turn the ignition switch OFF and
remove the first key.
3. Insert the second valid key and turn the ignition
switch ON within 15 seconds. After ten seconds a chime
will sound and the Theft Alarm Light will begin to flash.
Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the second key.
4. Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch and
turn the ignition switch ON within 60 seconds. After 10
seconds a single chime will sound. The Theft Alarm Light
will stop flashing, turn on for 3 seconds; then turn off.
The new Sentry Key has been programmed. The Keyless
Entry Transmitter will also be programmed during this
procedure. Repeat this procedure to program up to a
total of 8 keys. If you do not have a programmed sentry
key, contact your dealer for details.
NOTE: If a programmed key is lost, see your dealer to
have all remaining keys erased from the systems
memory. This will prevent the lost key from starting your
vehicle. The remaining keys must then be repro-
grammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to the dealer at
the time of service to be reprogrammed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
2
General Information
The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause undes-
ired operation.
SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system monitors the vehicle doors and ignition for
unauthorized operation. When the alarm is activated, the
system provides both audible and visual signals. For the
first 3 minutes the horn will sound and the headlights
and security telltale will flash repeatedly. For an addi-
tional 15 minutes only the headlights and security telltale
will flash. The engine will run only if a valid Sentry Key
is used to start the vehicle. Use of the Sentry Key will
disable the alarm.
Rearming of the System — If Equipped
The security system will rearm itself after the 15 addi-
tional minutes of headlights and security telltale flashing,
if the system has not been disabled. If the condition
which initiated the alarm is still present, the system will
ignore that condition and monitor the remaining doors
and ignition.
To Arm the System:
The alarm will set when you use the power door locks, or
use the Keyless Entry transmitter to lock the doors. After
all the doors are locked and closed the SECURITY light in
the instrument cluster will flash rapidly to signal that the
system is arming. The security light in the instrument
panel cluster will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to
indicate that the alarm is being set. After the alarm is set,
the security light will flash at a slower rate to indicate
that the system is armed.
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If the SECURITY light stays on continuously
during vehicle operation, have the system checked by
your dealer.
To Disarm the System:
Use the Keyless Entry transmitter to unlock the door. If
something has triggered the system in your absence, the
horn will sound three times when you unlock the doors
and the security lamp will flash for 30 seconds. Check the
vehicle for tampering.
The Security system will also disarm, if the vehicle is
started with a programmed Sentry Key. If an unpro-
grammed Sentry Key is used to start a vehicle, the engine
will run for 2 seconds and then the security alarm will be
initiated. To exit alarming mode, press the transmitter
Unlock button, or start the vehicle with a programmed
Sentry Key.
If the alarm system is armed and the battery becomes
disconnected the system will remain armed when the
battery is reconnected. The exterior lights will flash, the
horn will sound, and the ignition will not start the
vehicle. If this occurs, disarm the system.
Tamper Alert
If the horn sounds 3 times when you unlock a front door
using either a key or the Keyless Entry Transmitter, the
alarm has been activated. Check the vehicle for tamper-
ing.
Security System Manual Override
The system will not arm if you lock the doors using the
manual door lock plunger.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
2
ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the keyless
entry transmitter or open the doors.
The lights will fade to off after about 30 seconds or they
will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is
turned on.
NOTE:
•
The front courtesy overhead console, door courtesy
and liftgate lights do not turn on if the dimmer control
is in the interior lights ON position (extreme top
position).
•
The illuminated entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “defeat” position (extreme
downward position).
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate, and activate the panic alarm from distances up to
about 23 feet (7 meters) using a hand held radio trans-
mitter. The transmitter need not be pointed at the vehicle
to activate the system.
NOTE: Inserting the key into the ignition switch dis-
ables all buttons on that transmitter; however, the but-
tons on the remaining transmitters will continue to work.
Shifting the vehicle out of PARK disables all transmitter
buttons for all keys.
Two (2) transmitters may be supplied with the vehicle (as
seen below). Vehicles built with additional powered
options will be equipped from the factory with corre-
sponding buttons on the transmitters.
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To unlock the doors and liftgate:
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the transmitter
once to unlock the driver’s door, or twice to unlock all
doors and liftgate. When the UNLOCK button is pressed,
the illuminated entry will initiate and the parking lights
will flash on twice.
Remote Unlock Driver’s Door 1st
The system can be programmed to unlock all the doors or
driver’s door only upon the first UNLOCK button press
by using the following procedure:
•
On electronic vehicle information center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles refer to “Remote Unlock Driver’s
Door 1st?” under “Use Factory Settings?” in the EVIC
section of this manual.
•
On non EVIC – equipped vehicles perform the follow-
ing steps:
1. Perform this operation while standing outside the
vehicle.
2. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on your key fob.
3. Continue to hold the UNLOCK button, wait at least 4
seconds, but no longer than 10 seconds, then press and
hold the LOCK button. Release both buttons at the same
time.
Keyless Entry Transmitter
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
2
4. This will allow you to unlock all doors on the first
press of the UNLOCK button.
5. To reactivate the feature, repeat this procedure.
6. If the programming procedure was unsuccessful see
your authorized dealer for programming assistance.
To lock the doors and liftgate:
Press and release the LOCK button on the transmitter to
lock all doors. If the ignition is OFF, when the doors are
locked, the parking lights will flash on once and the horn
will chirp once.
Sound Horn On Lock
Press and release the LOCK button on the transmitter to
lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash and the
horn will chip once to acknowledge the lock signal. If
desired, the “Sound Horn On Lock” feature can be
turned on or off by using the following procedure:
•
On electronic vehicle information center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles refer to “Sound Horn On Lock?”
under “Use Factory Settings?” in the EVIC section of
this manual.
•
On non EVIC – equipped vehicles perform the follow-
ing steps:
1. Perform this operation while standing outside the
vehicle.
2. Press and hold the LOCK button on your key fob.
3. Continue to hold the LOCK button, wait at least 4
seconds, but no longer than 10 seconds, then press and
hold the PANIC button. Release both buttons at the same
time.
4. To reactivate the feature, repeat this procedure.
5. If the programming procedure was unsuccessful see
your authorized dealer for programming assistance.
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Open/Close Power Liftgate — If Equipped
Press the LIFTGATE button twice within five seconds to
open/close the power liftgate. The liftgate will beep for 2
seconds and then open/close. If the button is pushed
while the liftgate is being power closed, the liftgate will
reverse to the full open position.
If the liftgate is locked and is not equipped with a
powered liftgate, pressing the button will result in the
liftgate becoming unlocked for 30 seconds allowing you
to manually access the liftgate area. The liftgate will
re-lock automatically within 10 seconds once the liftgate
is closed.
Flash Lights On Lock/Unlock
The Flash Lights With Lock or Unlock feature can be
turned on or off.
•
On electronic vehicle information center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles refer to “Flash Lights On Lock/
Unlock?” under “Use Factory Settings?” in the EVIC
section of this manual.
•
On non EVIC - equipped vehicles perform the follow-
ing steps:
1. Perform this operation while standing outside the
vehicle.
2. Press and hold the LOCK button on your key fob.
3. Continue to hold the LOCK button, wait at least 4
seconds, but no longer than 10 seconds, then press and
hold the UNLOCK button. Release both buttons at the
same time.
4. To reactivate the feature, repeat this procedure.
5. If the programming procedure was unsuccessful see
your authorized dealer for programming assistance.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
2
Using The Panic Alarm:
To activate the Panic mode while the ignition is OFF press
and release the PANIC button on the transmitter once.
When the Panic mode is activated, the interior lights will
illuminate, the headlamps and parking lights will flash,
and the horn will sound.
To cancel the Panic mode press and release the PANIC
button on the transmitter a second time. Panic mode will
automatically cancel after 3 minutes or if the vehicle is
started and exceeds 15 mph. During the Panic Mode, the
door locks and remote keyless entry systems will func-
tion normally. Panic mode will not disarm the security
system on vehicles so equipped.
NOTE: When you turn off the panic alarm by pressing
the PANIC button a second time, you may have to be
closer to the vehicle due to the radio frequency noises of
the system.
Programming Additional Transmitters
Refer to SENTRY KEY “Customer Key Programming.”
NOTE: If you do not have a programmed transmitter,
contact your authorized dealer for assistance.
Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032 bat-
tery.
NOTE: Perchlorate Material — special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate
NOTE: Do not touch the battery terminals that are on
the back housing or the printed circuit board.
1. With the transmitter buttons facing down, use a small
screwdriver or similar flat object to pry the two halves of
the transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the
rubber gasket during removal.
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Remove and replace the battery. Avoid touching the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
3. To reassemble the transmitter case, snap the two
halves together. Make sure there is an even “gap” be-
tween the two halves. Test transmitter operation.
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
If your Remote Keyless Entry transmitter fails to operate
from a normal distance, check for these two conditions.
1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of
the battery is a minimum of three years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
Separating Transmitter Halves
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
2
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
Lock the doors by pushing up on the lock knob on each
door trim panel.
If the lock knob is up when you shut the door, the door
will lock. Therefore, make sure the keys are not inside the
vehicle before closing the door.
WARNING!
•
For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
•
When leaving the vehicle always remove the key
from the ignition lock, and lock your vehicle. Do
not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised
use of vehicle equipment may cause severe per-
sonal injuries and death.
Door Lock Plunger
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is located on each front door
trim panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock all doors and
liftgate.
If you press the power door lock switch while the key is
in the ignition, and any front door is open, the power
locks will not operate. This prevents you from acciden-
tally locking your keys in the vehicle. Removing the key
or closing the door will allow the locks to operate. A
chime will sound if the key is in the ignition and a door
is open, as a reminder to remove the key.
Auto Door Locks — If Equipped
The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power
door locks if all of the following conditions are met:
1. The Automatic Door Locks feature is enabled.
2. The transmission is in gear.
3. All doors are closed.
4. The throttle is pressed.
5. The vehicle speed is above 15 mph (24 km/h).
6. The doors were not previously locked using the power
door lock switch or remote keyless entry transmitter.
Power Door Lock Switch
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
2
If desired, the “Auto Door Locks?” feature can be turned
on or off by using the following procedure:
•
On electronic vehicle information center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles refer to “Auto Door Locks?” under
“Use Factory Settings?” in the EVIC section of this
manual.
•
On non EVIC - equipped vehicles perform the follow-
ing steps:
Auto Door Locks Programming
1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.
2. Fasten your seat belt (Fastening the seat belt will
cancel any chiming that may confuse you during this
programming procedure).
3. Place the key into the ignition.
4. Within 15 seconds cycle the key from the LOCK
position to the ON/RUN position a minimum of four
times; ending in the LOCK position (Do not start the
engine).
5. Within 30 seconds, press the driver’s door lock switch
in the LOCK direction.
6. Asingle chime will be heard to indicate the feature has
been disabled.
7. To reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
8. If a chime is not heard, program mode was canceled
before the feature could be disabled. If necessary, repeat
this procedure.
Auto Unlock On Exit — If Equipped
This feature unlocks all of the doors of the vehicle when
any door is opened. This will occur only after the vehicle
has been driven (shifted out of Park with all doors
closed) and then shifted back into the Park position.
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
This feature will not operate if there is any manual
operation of the power door locks (Lock or Unlock). If
desired, the “Auto Unlock On Exit?” feature can be
turned on or off by using the following procedure:
•
On electronic vehicle information center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles refer to “Auto Unlock On Exit?”
under “Use Factory Settings?” in the EVIC section of
this manual.
•
On non EVIC - equipped vehicles perform the follow-
ing steps:
Auto Unlock On Exit Programming
1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.
2. Fasten your seat belt (fastening the seat belt will cancel
any chimes that may be confusing during this program-
ming procedure).
3. Insert the key into the ignition.
4. Within 15 seconds, cycle the key from the LOCK
position to the ON/RUN position a minimum of four
times ending in the LOCK position (do not start the
engine).
5. Within 30 seconds, press the driver’s door lock switch
in the UNLOCK direction.
6. A single chime will sound to indicate the feature has
been changed.
7. Repeat the above steps to alternate the availability of
this feature.
8. If a chime is not heard, program mode was canceled
before the feature could be changed. If necessary repeat
this procedure.
NOTE: Use the Auto Door Locks and Auto Unlock
features in accordance with local laws.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
2
Child Protection Door Lock
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a child
protection door lock system.
NOTE: When the child lock system is engaged, the door
can be opened only by using the outside door handle
even though the inside door lock is in the unlocked
position.
To Engage the Child Protection Door Lock
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the vehicle’s ignition key (or any
similar item) into the child lock control and slide it
upward.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to engage the Child Protection
Door Lock on the opposite rear door.
NOTE: After engaging the child protection door lock
system, always test the door from the inside to make
certain it is in the desired position.
Child Lock Control
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged,
move the door lock knob to the UNLOCK position, roll
down the window and open the door with the outside
door handle.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the child protection locks are
engaged.
To Disengage the Child Protection Door Lock
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the vehicle’s ignition key (or any
similar item) into the child lock control and slide it
downward.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to disengage the Child Protection
Door Lock on the opposite rear door.
NOTE: After disengaging the child protection door lock
system, always test the door from the inside to make
certain it is in the desired position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
2
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The window controls on the driver’s door control all the
door windows. The switches will operate only when the
ignition switch is in the ON or ACCESSORY position or
during accessory delay.
The window lock switch on the driver’s door allows you
to disable the window controls on the passenger doors.
When the lock switch is pressed the window controls on
the passenger doors will not illuminate and the passen-
ger windows will be disabled.
Auto Down Feature
All the power window switches have an auto down
feature. Press the window switch to the second detent,
release, and the window will go down automatically.
To open the window part way, press the window switch
to the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
The power window switches remain active for up to 45
seconds after the ignition switch has been turned off.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
Power Window Switches
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The time is customer programmable through the Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Power Accessory Delay?” under “Personal Settings
(Customer Programmable Features)” in Section 4 of this
manual for details.
Auto Up Feature with Anti–Pinch Protection
Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and
the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
auto-up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the first detent and release when you want the window to
stop.
NOTE: If the window runs into any obstacle during
auto-closure, it will reverse direction and then stop.
Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to
close the window.
NOTE: Any impact due to rough road conditions may
trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during
auto-closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
first detent and hold to close window manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to
clear your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from
the window path before closing.
Reset
Any time the vehicle battery is disconnected, or goes
dead, the auto-up function will be disabled. To reactivate
the auto-up feature, perform the following steps after
vehicle power is restored:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
2
1. Pull the window switch up to close window com-
pletely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue to
hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after
the window is fully open.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting.
LIFTGATE
The liftgate can be unlocked using the remote keyless
entry or by activating the power door lock switches
located on either interior front door trim panel.
Once unlocked, the liftgate can be opened or closed. To
open the liftgate, pull the release handle while raising the
liftgate with one fluid motion.
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The liftgate will not manually open if the vehicle is
locked, in gear or if the vehicle speed is above 0 mph (0
km/h).
NOTE:
•
In the event of a power malfunction to the liftgate, an
emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open
the liftgate. The emergency liftgate latch release can be
accessed through a snap-in cover located on the lift-
gate trim panel.
•
If the liftgate is locked and is not equipped with a
powered liftgate, pressing the button on the remote
keyless entry transmitter will result in the liftgate
becoming unlocked for 30 seconds allowing you to
manually access the liftgate area. The liftgate will
re-lock automatically within 10 seconds once the lift-
gate is closed.
Power Liftgate — If Equipped
The power liftgate may be opened manually or by using
the button on the remote keyless entry transmitter. Press
the button on the remote keyless entry transmitter twice
within five seconds, to open the power liftgate. Once the
liftgate is fully open, pressing the button twice within
five seconds a second time will close the liftgate.
Liftgate Release Handle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
2
The power liftgate may also be opened by pressing the
button located on the overhead console.
When the remote button is pressed the “Lamp Flash”
feature is enabled the tail lights will flash to signal that
the liftgate is opening or closing. A beeping signal will
sound two seconds before the liftgate starts to open or
close.
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is
clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched
before driving away.
NOTE:
•
If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is
closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically
reverse to the closed or open position, provided it
meets sufficient resistance.
Power Liftgate Button
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the
liftgate. Light pressure anywhere along these strips
will cause the liftgate to return to the open position.
•
The liftgate must be in the full open position in order
to power close. If the liftgate is not fully open, press
the power button to fully open the liftgate and then
you can press the power button to close.
•
If the liftgate release switch is activated while the
power liftgate is closing, the liftgate will reverse to the
full open position.
•
The power liftgate switches will not operate if the
vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph
(0 km/h).
•
The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures
below 212°F(224° C) or temperatures above 143° F
(62° C). Be sure to remove any build-up of snow or ice
from the liftgate before pressing any of the power
liftgate switches.
•
If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions
within the same cycle, the system will automatically
stop and must be opened or closed manually.
WARNING!
•
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poison-
ous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
•
If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
2
Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
However, because the gas pressure drops with tempera-
ture, it may be necessary to assist the props when
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems. These include the front
and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers, front
airbags for both the driver and front passenger, and if
equipped, left and right window bags for the driver and
passengers seated next to a window and a driver inflat-
able knee blocker. If you will be carrying children too
small for adult-size seat belts, your seat belts or the
LATCH feature (refer to the Child Restraint section in this
manual), can be used to hold infant and child restraint
systems.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Occupant Classifi-
cation System (OCS) there will be a Passenger Airbag
Disabled (PAD) Indicator Light located on the center of
the instrument panel.
Passenger Airbag Light — If OCS Equipped
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The front airbags have a multi stage inflator
design. This allows the airbag to have different rates of
inflation that are based on collision severity.
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
WARNING!
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other
passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All the seats in your vehicle are equipped with Lap/
Shoulder Belts.
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
2
normal conditions. But in a collision, the belt will lock
and reduce the risk of your striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out.
WARNING!
•
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
•
Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the best.
•
Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to
wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas-
sengers safe, too.
•
Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is near the seatback of the
front seats and next to your arm in the rear seats. Grasp
the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate
up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go
around your lap.
Pulling Out Lap/Shoulder Belt
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
2
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click”.
WARNING!
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not
protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too high
on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always
buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well. In a
sudden stop you could move too far forward, increasing
the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
• A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle
in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A belt
worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs
aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the belt over your
shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force
in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you
from injury during a collision. You are more likely to hit
your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder
belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used
together.
Connecting Latch Plate To Buckle
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,
tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t be
at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as pos-
sible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In a collision
it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight.
If you can’t straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it to
your dealer and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
Removing Slack From Belt
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
2
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assem-
blies must be replaced after a collision if they have
been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front seats, the shoulder belt anchorage can be
adjusted upward or downward to help position the belt
away from your neck. Press the button to release the
anchorage, and then move it up or down to the position
that serves you best.
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
you’ll prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
Example of a Twisted Seat Belt
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
2
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grasp and twist the belt webbing 180° to create a
fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.
Grasp and Twist Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belt assemblies for both front seating positions
are equipped with pretensioning devices that are de-
signed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of
a collision. These devices improve the performance of the
seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the
occupant early in a collision. Pretensioners are designed
to work for all size occupants.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the front airbag con-
trol module (see Airbag Section). Like the front airbags,
the pretensioners are single use items. After a collision
that is severe enough to deploy the airbags and preten-
sioners, both must be replaced.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
If the driver’s seat belt has not been buckled within 60
seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is
greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), BeltAlert will alert the
driver or front passenger to buckle their seat belt. The
driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle
their seat belts. Once the warning is triggered, BeltAlert
will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning
Light for 96 seconds or until the driver’s seat belt is
buckled.
BeltAlert will be reactivated if the driver’s or front
passenger’s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10
seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8
km/h).
BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized
dealer or by following these steps:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
2
NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first
60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON
or RUN position. DaimlerChrysler does not recommend
deactivating the Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert).
1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, and
buckle the driver’s seat belt.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN position (engine
does not need to be running), and wait for the Seat Belt
Warning Light to turn off.
3. Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the
RUN position, unbuckle and then re-buckle the driver’s
seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds, ending
with the seat belt buckled.
NOTE: Watch for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn on
while unbuckling and off while re-buckling the seat belt.
It may be necessary to retract the seat belt.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. A single
chime will sound to signify that you have successfully
completed the programming.
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be reacti-
vated by repeating this procedure.
NOTE: Although BeltAlert has been deactivated, the
Seat Belt Warning Light will continue to illuminate while
the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled.
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancies. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic-Locking Retractor (ALR)
The center seating position on vehicles equipped with a
second row bench seat is equipped with an Automatic-
Locking Retractor (ALR). Pull the belt from the retractor
until there is enough to allow you to pass through the
child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle.
Then pull on the belt until it is all removed from the
retractor. Allow the belt to return into the retractor,
pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion
about the child restraint. Follow the instructions of the
child restraint manufacturer.
NOTE: To reset this feature you must let all of the belt
webbing return into the retractor. You will not be able to
pull out more webbing until all of the webbing has been
returned back into the retractor.
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, your dealer can
provide you with a seat belt extender. This extender
should be used only if the existing belt is not long
enough. When it is not required, remove the extender
and stow it.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
2
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug, and in the recommended seating
positions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
Driver and Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint System - Airbag
This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and front
passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver’s front airbag is mounted in the
center of the steering wheel. The passenger’s front airbag
is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove
compartment. The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on
the airbag covers.
NOTE: The front airbags are certified to the Federal
regulations that allow less forceful deployment in low
speed collisions.
The front airbags have a multi stage inflator design. This
may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation
that are based on collision severity and occupant size.
Front Airbags and Knee Bolsters Locations
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Also, the front passenger airbag is certified to the Federal
regulations that define Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) system.
This vehicle may also be equipped with a driver inflat-
able knee blocker located on the instrument panel below
the steering column.
This vehicle may also be equipped with left and right
side curtain airbags to protect the driver and passengers
sitting next to a window. If the vehicle is equipped with
window bags, they are located above the side windows.
Their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG.
NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim; but they will open to allow airbag deployment.
Side Curtain Airbags
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
2
WARNING!
• Do not put anything on or around the airbag covers
or attempt to manually open them. You may dam-
age the airbags and you could be injured because
the airbags are not there to protect you. These
protective covers for the airbag cushions are de-
signed to open only when the airbags are inflating.
• If your vehicle is equipped with left and right
window bags, do not stack luggage or other cargo
up high enough to block the location of the side
curtain airbag. The area where the side curtain
airbag is located should remain free from any
obstructions.
• If your vehicle is equipped with left and right
window bags, do not have any accessory items
installed which will alter the roof, including add-
ing a sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks
that require permanent attachments (bolts or
screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not
drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason.
Front airbags, along with seat belts, and front seat belt
pretensioners, work with the instrument panel knee
blockers to provide improved protection for the driver
and front passenger. Left and right window bags also
work with seat belts to improve occupant protection.
The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types
of collisions. The front airbags deploy in moderate to
severe frontal collisions.
NOTE: If equipped with an Occupant Classification
System (OCS), the passenger front airbag may not deploy
even when the driver front airbag has determined the
seat is empty or is occupied by a child.
If your vehicle is so equipped, the window bag on the
crash side of the vehicle is triggered in moderate to
severe side collisions. But even in collisions where the
airbags inflate, you need the seat belts to keep you in the
right position for the airbags to protect you properly.
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize
the risk of harm from a deploying airbag.
1. Children 12 years old and under should ride buckled
up in the rear seat.
2. Infants in rear-facing child restraints should NEVER
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front
airbag. An airbag deployment could cause severe injury
or death to infants in that position.
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle
seat belt properly (refer to information on Child Restraint
in this section) should be secured in the rear seat in child
restraints or belt-positioning booster seats.
4. Older children who do not use child restraints or
belt-positioning booster seats should ride properly buck-
led up in the rear seat. Never allow children to slide the
shoulder belt behind them or under their arm.
5. If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front
passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded, move the
seat as far back as possible, and use the proper child
restraint (refer to information on Child Restraint in this
section).
6. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
7. All occupants should use their seat belts properly.
8. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the airbags time to inflate.
9. If your vehicle has side curtain airbags do not lean
against the door, airbags will inflate forcefully into the
space between you and the door.
10. If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the
Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided in the 9If
You Need Customer Assistance9 section in this manual.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
2
WARNING!
•
Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions the airbags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
airbags.
•
Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front airbag deployment could cause
serious injury. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit
back, comfortably extending your arms to reach
the steering wheel or instrument panel.
•
If the vehicle has left and right window bags, they
also need room to inflate. Do not lean against the
door or window. Sit upright in the center of the
seat.
“The Airbag System” consists of the following:
•
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
•
AIRBAG Light
•
Driver Airbag
•
Front Passenger Airbag
•
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
— If Equipped
•
Front Impact Sensors
•
Side Impact Sensors — If Equipped
•
Steering Wheel and Column
•
Instrument Panel
•
Seat Belt Reminder Light
•
Driver Inflatable Knee Bolster — If Equipped
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Knee Impact Bolster
•
Front Seat Belt Pretensioners
•
Front Passenger Seat Occupant Classification System
(OCS) — If OCS Equipped
−
Occupant Classification Module
−
Passenger Airbag Disabled (PAD) Indicator Light
−
Interconnecting Wiring
−
Bladder Assembly
−
Belt Tension Sensor
How The Airbag System Works
•
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
if a frontal collision is severe enough to require the
airbags to inflate. Based on the level of collision
severity, the front control module determines the
proper rate of inflation. The front airbag inflators are
designed to provide different rates of airbag inflation.
•
The ORC will not detect side, roll over, or rear impacts.
•
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts
of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or RUN positions. These include all of the
items listed above except the steering wheel and
column, instrument panel and passenger knee bol-
sters. If the key is in the OFF position, in the ACC
position, or not in the ignition, the airbags are not on
and will not inflate.
•
Also, the ORC turns on the AIRBAG warn-
ing light and PAD indicator light in the
center of the instrument panel for 6 to 8
seconds for a self-check when the ignition is
first turned on. After the self-check, the AIRBAG
warning light will turn off. If equipped, the PAD
indicator light will function normally. If the ORC
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
2
detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns
on the AIRBAG warning light either momentarily or
continuously. A single chime will sound if the light
comes on again after initial start up.
WARNING!
Ignoring the AIRBAG warning light in your instru-
ment panel could mean you won’t have the airbags to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have the airbag system checked right
away.
•
The Driver and Passenger Airbag/Inflator Units are
located in the center of the steering wheel and the right
side of the instrument panel. When the ORC and
impact sensors detects a collision requiring the air-
bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the front airbags.
Different airbag inflation rates may be possible based
on collision severity. The steering wheel hub trim
cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the airbags inflate
to their full size. The airbags fully inflate in about
50–70 milliseconds. This is about half of the time it
takes to blink your eyes. The airbags then quickly
deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front
passenger.
The driver’s and passenger’s front airbag gas is vented
through the airbag material towards the instrument
panel. In this way the airbags do not interfere with
your control of the vehicle.
•
The Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains are designed to
activate only in certain side collisions. When the ORC
and the side impact sensors (with side impact option)
detects a collision requiring the window bags to
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
inflate, it signals the inflators on the crash side of the
vehicle. A quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to
inflate the window bag. The inflating window bag
pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the
way and covers the window. The airbag inflates in
about 30 milliseconds (about one quarter of the time it
takes to blink your eyes) with enough force to injure
you if you are not belted and seated properly, or if
items are positioned in the area where the window bag
inflates. This especially applies to children. The win-
dow bag is only about 3
1
⁄
2
inches (9 cm) thick when it
is inflated.
•
When the ORC and the impact sensors detect a
collision requiring the Driver Inflatable Knee Blocker
— If Equipped, signals the inflator unit. A quantity of
nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the Driver Inflat-
able Knee Blocker. The Driver Inflatable Knee Blocker
inflates rearward towards the driver’s knees to help
protect the knees and position you for the best inter-
action with the front airbag. The Driver Inflatable
Knee Blocker fully inflates in about 50 milliseconds,
this is only about half of the time it takes you to blink
your eyes. It then quickly deflates while helping to
protect the driver’s knees.
•
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees, and
position everyone for the best interaction with the
front airbag.
•
If your vehicle contains a Passenger Airbag Disable
indicator light, it will be equipped with the Occupant
Classification System (OCS). The OCS system will
classify an occupant into a size category based on
sensor readings from within the seat cushion. Occu-
pants should try to remain in a normally seated
position. If the occupant’s weight is transferred to
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
2
another object in the vehicle (i.e. feet on the dash-
board), the OCS may not be able to properly approxi-
mate occupant size. Furthermore, the occupant size
may appear to increase or decrease due to objects
hanging on the seat, other passengers pushing on the
seat, or objects lodged underneath the seat.
If there is a rapid change in temperature or humidity,
the OCS may not be able to properly approximate
occupant size. If your seat including your trim cover
and cushion needs to be serviced in any way (includ-
ing removal or loosening/tightening of seat attach-
ment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized dealer.
Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be
used.
If there is a fault present in the system, the AIRBAG
warning light will illuminate indicating that you should
take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. In the presence
of an occupant in the passenger seat, if both the PAD
indicator light and AIRBAG warning light are illumi-
nated the airbag will be disabled.
The ORC will not allow front airbag deployment in the
event of a collision for occupants classified into the
empty or child size categories. The PAD indicator light
will illuminate indicating that the Passenger Airbag is
OFF when the OCS has determined that the occupant size
category is a child. Also, when the seat is empty or an
object that weighs less than a predetermined threshold is
placed on the seat, the light will remain OFF. (The PAD
indicator light is an amber light located on the center of
the instrument panel above the climate controls.)
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
For almost all sizes of properly seated adults, the airbag
will be enabled in the event of a collision. For small
teenagers and some small adults, depending on size, the
airbag may or may not be enabled in the event of a
collision. Both drivers and passengers should always use
the PAD indicator light as an indication if the front
passenger is properly positioned or not. If the PAD
indicator light comes on when an adult is in the passen-
ger seat, have the passenger re-position themselves in the
seat until the light goes out.
Remember, if the PAD indicator light is illuminated the
passenger front airbag will not inflate. For properly
installed child restraint systems and children properly
seated on the front passenger seat, the airbag will be
disabled. If at all possible, place children 12 years and
younger in a back seat.
•
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) — If
Equipped is located beneath the front passenger seat.
The OCM classifies the occupant into one of three size
categories based on the input from the Bladder Assem-
bly and Belt Tension Sensor. The size categories in-
clude empty, child, and adult. The OCM sends the
Occupant Classification to the ORC to identify if a
Passenger Airbag Light — If OCS Equipped
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
2
front passenger airbag is allowed. If a fault is present,
the AIRBAG warning light is illuminated.
•
The Passenger Airbag Disabled (PAD) Indicator
Light — If Equipped indicates to the driver and
passenger when the airbag is turned OFF in the
presence of a properly seated occupant. When the PAD
indicator light is illuminated, the airbag is OFF. Also,
when the Occupant Classification System (OCS) de-
tects either an empty seat of a weight less than the
predetermined occupant threshold, the ORC will not
illuminate the PAD indicator light even though the
airbag is turned off. When the OCS detects an adult
the PAD indicator light will be off, and the airbag will
be enabled.
•
The Belt Tension Sensor (BTS) — If Equipped is
located at the outboard passenger lap belt anchor. The
BTS generates a signal based on outboard lap belt
tension. This signal is sent to the OCM to ensure that
the resultant bladder pressure increase due to applied
lap belt tension does not cause a small occupant to be
classified as a larger occupant.
•
The Bladder Assembly — If Equipped is located
beneath the seat cushion foam. The pressure sensor
sends a signal to the OCM.
The front passenger seat assembly contains critical com-
ponents that affect the front passenger airbag deploy-
ment. Correctly functioning front passenger seat compo-
nents are critical for the Occupant Classification System
(OCS) to properly classify the front passenger and calcu-
late the proper airbag deployment. Do not make any
modifications to the front passenger seat components,
assembly, or to the seat cover.
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
the front passenger seat assembly, its related compo-
nents, or seat cover may inadvertently change the
airbag deployment in case of a frontal crash. This
could result in death or serious injury to the front
seat passenger if the vehicle is involved in an acci-
dent. A modified vehicle may not comply with re-
quired Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(FMVSS).
The following requirements must be strictly adhered to:
•
Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
•
Do not modify the front seat center console or center
position seat in any way.
•
Do not use prior or future model year seat covers not
designated for the specific model being repaired. Al-
ways use the correct seat cover specified for the
vehicle.
•
Do not replace the seat cover with an aftermarket seat
cover.
•
Do not add a secondary seat cover other than those
approved by DaimlerChrysler/Mopar.
•
At no time should any supplemental restraint system
(SRS) component or SRS related component or fas-
tener be modified or replaced with any part except
those which are approved by DaimlerChrysler/
Mopar.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
2
If A Deployment Occurs
The airbag system is designed to deploy the airbags
when the ORC and impact sensors detect a moderate-to-
severe collision, to help restrain the vehicle passengers,
and then immediately deflate.
NOTE: A collision that is not severe enough to need
airbag protection will not activate the system. This does
not mean something is wrong with the airbag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any
or all of the following may occur:
•
The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra-
sions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
•
As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your
clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instruc-
tions for cleaning.
•
It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the
airbags have deployed. If you are involved in another
collision, the airbags will not be in place to protect you.
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Deployed airbags, front seat belt pretensioners and
driver inflatable knee blocker cannot protect you in
another collision. Have the airbags, front seat belt
pretensioners and driver inflatable knee blocker (if
equipped) replaced by an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Enhanced Accident Response
If the airbags and seat belt pretensioners deploy after an
impact and the electrical system remains functional,
vehicles equipped with power door locks will unlock
automatically. In addition, approximately 10 seconds
after the vehicle has stopped moving, the interior lights
will illuminate until the ignition switch is turned off.
In the event of an impact that causes airbag deployment,
with the vehicle stopped, and the vehicle communication
network intact, and the power intact, the Enhanced
Accident Response System performs the following func-
tions:
•
Cuts off fuel to the engine
•
Flashes hazard lights
•
Turns on the interior lights approximately 10 seconds
after the vehicle has stopped moving, and will remain
on as long as the battery has power or until the
ignition key is removed
•
Unlocks the doors automatically
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
2
Maintaining Your Airbag System
WARNING!
•
Modifications to any part of the airbag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured because the airbags are not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure,
or frame.
•
Do not attempt to modify any part of your ad-
vanced airbag system. The airbag may inflate
accidentally or may not function properly if modi-
fications are made. Take your vehicle to an autho-
rized dealer for any advanced airbag system ser-
vice. If it is necessary to modify an advanced
airbag system for persons with disabilities, contact
your authorized dealer.
WARNING!
•
You need proper knee impact protection in a
collision. Do not mount or locate any aftermarket
equipment on or behind the knee bolsters.
•
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has airbags.
NOTE: Perchlorate Material — special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate.
Airbag Light
You will want to have the airbags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. While
the airbag system is designed to be mainte-
nance free, if any of the following occurs, have
an authorized dealer service the system immediately.
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
The AIRBAG light does not come on or flickers during
the 6 to 8 seconds when the ignition switch is first
turned on.
•
The light remains on or flickers after the 6 to 8 second
interval.
•
The light flickers or comes on and remains on while
driving.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
In the event of an accident, your vehicle is designed to
record up to 5 seconds of specific vehicle data parameters
(see the following list) in an event data recorder prior to
the moment of airbag deployment, or near deployment,
and up to a quarter second of high-speed deceleration
data during and/or after airbag deployment. EDR data
are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys, or nearly
deploys, and are otherwise unavailable.
NOTE:
1. A near-deployment event occurs when the airbag
sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica-
tive of a crash, but not severe enough to warrant airbag
deployment.
2. Under certain circumstances, EDR data may not be
recorded (e.g., loss of battery power).
In conjunction with other data gathered during a com-
plete accident investigation, the electronic data may be
used by DaimlerChrysler Corporation and others to learn
more about the possible causes of crashes and associated
injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle perfor-
mance. In addition to crash investigations initiated by
DaimlerChrysler Corporation, such investigations may
be requested by customers, insurance carriers, govern-
ment officials, and professional crash researchers, such as
those associated with universities, and with hospital and
insurance organizations.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
2
In the event that an investigation is undertaken by
DaimlerChrysler Corporation (regardless of initiative),
the company or its designated representative will first
obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for
the vehicle (usually the vehicle owner or lessee) before
accessing the electronic data stored, unless ordered to
download data by a court with legal jurisdiction (i.e.,
pursuant to a warrant). A copy of the data will be
provided to the custodial entity upon request. General
data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes
may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash
databases, such as those maintained by the US govern-
ment and various states. Data of a potentially sensitive
nature, such as would identify a particular driver, ve-
hicle, or crash, will be treated confidentially. Confidential
data will not be disclosed by DaimlerChrysler Corpora-
tion to any third party except when:
1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data
with a particular crash record in an aggregate database,
provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter
preserved
2. Used in defense of litigation involving a
DaimlerChrysler Corporation product
3. Requested by police under a legal warrant
4. Otherwise required by law
Data Parameters that May Be Recorded:
•
Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning light status for
electronically-controlled safety systems, including the
airbag system
•
Airbag disable light status (if equipped)
•
9Time9 of airbag deployment (in terms of ignition
cycles and vehicle mileage)
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Airbag deployment level (if applicable)
•
Impact acceleration and angle
•
Seatbelt status
•
Brake status (service and parking brakes)
•
Accelerator status (including vehicle speed)
•
Engine control status (including engine speed)
•
Transmission gear selection
•
Cruise control status
•
Traction/stability control status
•
Tire pressure monitoring system status – If Equipped
Child Restraint
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times — babies and children, too. Every state in the
United States and all Canadian provinces require that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years and under should ride properly buck-
led up in a seat appropriate for their age and size.
According to crash statistics, children are safer when
properly restrained in the rear seats, rather than in the
front.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
2
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,
can become a missile inside the vehicle. The force
required to hold even an infant on your lap could
become so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others could
be badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
Infants And Small Children
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat owner’s manual to ensure you have the right seat for
your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your child.
•
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant
carriers and 9convertible9 child seats. Both types of
child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap/
shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage
system. Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tether for CHil-
dren (LATCH)” later in this section.
•
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). 9Convertible9 child seats can be
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are
less than one year old.
•
Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger
airbag. An airbag deployment could cause severe
injury or death to infants in this position.
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Older Children and Child Restraints
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who are
older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children
who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who are older
than one year. These child seats are also held in the
vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child
restraint anchorage system. Refer to “Lower Anchors and
Tether for CHildren (LATCH)” later in this section.
The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing
more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small to fit
the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child cannot sit
with knees bent over the vehicle’s cushion while the
child’s back is against the seatback, then the child should
use a Belt Positioning Booster Seat. The child and booster
seat are held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt.
(Some booster seats are equipped with a front shield and
are held in the vehicle by the lap portion.)
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
•
Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
•
The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
•
Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
•
If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. If this doesn’t
help, move the child to the center rear seating position
and use the lap belt. Never allow a child to put the
shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back.
NOTE: For additional information, refer to
www.seatcheck.org or call 1-866-SEATCHECK.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
2
WARNING!
•
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex-
actly when installing an infant or child restraint.
•
A rearward facing child restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward facing child re-
straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy-
ing passenger airbag which may cause severe or
fatal injury to the infant.
Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child
restraint:
•
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. We also recommend that you make sure
that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle
where you will use it, before you buy it.
•
The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
•
Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
The passenger seat belts are equipped with cinching
latch plates, which are designed to keep the lap
portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. Pulling up on the
shoulder portion of the lap/shoulder belt will tighten
the belt. The cinching latch plate will keep the belt
tight, however, any seat belt system will loosen with
time, so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if
necessary.
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path
opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate
from the buckle and twist the short buckle end of the
belt several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate
into the buckle with the release button facing out.
•
If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect
the latch plate from the buckle, turn the buckle
around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle
again. If you still can’t make the child restraint secure,
try a different seating position.
•
Buckle the child into the seat according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions.
•
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
Don’t leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
collision, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and
cause serious personal injury.
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)
Each vehicle is equipped with two child restraint anchor-
age systems called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren. The LATCH child
restraint anchorage systems are installed on second-row
seats only. LATCH child restraint anchorage systems are
not provided on the six passenger third row seats.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
2
Six passenger vehicles are equipped with second row
fold & tumble seats with lower anchorages that can
accommodate rigid mount or flexible webbing-mounted
LATCH-compatible child seats. The third row seating
positions are not equipped with lower anchorages. How-
ever, the third row driver side seating position is
equipped with a tether anchor. If you are installing
LATCH-compatible child restraints in any third row
seating position, you must use the vehicle’s seat belt.
Five passenger vehicles are equipped with a second row
bench seat only. The two outboard seating positions have
lower anchorages that can accommodate rigid mount or
flexible webbing-mounted LATCH-compatible child
seats. The center seating position of the bench seat can
LATCH ANCHORS
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
also accommodate a flexible webbing-mounted LATCH-
compatible child seat by using the inboard lower anchors
of the two outboard seating positions. Arigid mount seat
can only be installed at this seating location by using the
vehicle’s seat belt. Regardless of the specific type of lower
attachment, NEVER install LATCH-compatible child
seats such that two child seats share a common lower
anchorage. If you are installing LATCH-compatible child
restraints in adjacent rear seating positions, you can use
the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat belt for the
outboard position, but you must use the vehicle’s seat
belt at the center position.
The lower anchor bars of the LATCH System are located
where the seat back meets the seat cushion. The tether
anchors are located on the rear surface of the seat. Child
restraint systems designed to be compatible with the
vehicles LATCH System are now available. LATCH child
restraints make installation into the vehicle simple and
Bench Seat LATCH Anchors
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
2
convenient. When using the LATCH System, always
follow the child restraint manufacturer’s installation in-
structions.
NOTE: If your child restraint seat is not LATCH com-
patible, install the restraint using the vehicle seat belts.
Tether Anchors
There are tether strap anchorages behind all second row
seating positions and for six passenger vehicles on the
driver’s side third row seating position. The tether an-
chors are located in the rear surface of the seat. When
using the tether anchorages in the second row fold &
tumble seating positions and in the outboard second row
bench seating positions, ensure that the strap is routed
over the top of the seatback and under the head restraint
between the head restraint posts.
When the tether anchorage is used in the center second
row bench seating position or on the third row seating
position, where equipped, the strap should be positioned
straight over the top of the seatback.
2ND ROW TETHER ANCHOR
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
When the tether anchorage is used in the third row
seating position, the strap should be positioned straight
over the top of the seatback.
Installing A Child Restraint
We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Many,
but not all, restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector and a means for adjusting the tension in the
Bench Seat Tether Anchors
3RD ROW TETHER ANCHOR
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
2
strap. Forward-facing toddler restraints and some
rearward-facing infant restraints will also be equipped
with a tether strap, a hook and means for adjusting the
tension in the strap.
In general, you will first loosen the adjusters on the lower
straps and tether straps so that you can more easily attach
the hook or connector to the lower anchorages and tether
anchorages. Then tighten all three straps as you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the seat.
Child restraint systems having attachments designed to
connect to the lower anchorages are now available. Child
restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection
to the seatback tether anchorage have been available for
some time. In fact, many child restraint manufacturer’s
will provide add-on tether strap kits for some of their
older products.
Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to
passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years, child
restraint systems having attachments for those anchor-
ages will continue to have features for installation in
vehicles using the lap or lap/shoulder belt. They will also
have tether straps, and you are urged to take advantage
of all of the available attachments provided with your
child restraint in any vehicle.
NOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts
not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This should
stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child.
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are
not toys and should not be played with, and never leave
your child unattended in the vehicle.
Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we
have described here. Again, carefully follow the instruc-
tions that come with the child restraint system.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
Transporting Pets
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet could be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine in
your new vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55
mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration, within the
limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.
Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be
detrimental and should be avoided.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
2
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur.
The recommended viscosity and quality grades are
shown in Section 7 of this manual. NON-DETERGENT
OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE
USED.
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
considered as a normal part of the break-in and not
interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
SAFETY TIPS
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO)
follow the safety tips below.
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or
out of the area.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force
outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
If you are required to drive with the deck lid / liftgate
open, make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn
webbing, etc. If there is any question regarding belt or
retractor condition, replace the belt.
Airbag Light
The light should come on and remain on for 4 seconds as
a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON.
If the LED is not lit during starting, and/or the light stays
on or comes on while driving, have the system checked
by an authorized dealer.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield.
NOTE: If the defroster is not working or you are unable
to feel air against the windshield in defrost mode, please
see your authorized dealer service center for repairs.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
2
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear or uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread. Inspect tread and sidewall for cuts or
cracks. Check wheel nuts for tightness, and tires (includ-
ing spare) for proper pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or fuel, power steering fluid, trans-
mission fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
m Mirrors ...............................86
▫ Inside Day / Night Mirror ................86
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped ....86
▫ Driver’s Side Outside Mirror Auto Dimmer —
If Equipped ..........................87
▫ Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature ...........87
▫ Outside Mirror — Driver’s Side ............87
▫ Outside Mirror — Passenger’s Side ..........88
▫ Power Remote-Control Mirrors .............88
▫ Heated Remote Control Mirrors —
If Equipped ..........................89
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors ................89
m Hands–Free Communication (UConnect™) —
If Equipped ............................89
▫ Operations ...........................91
▫ Phone Call Features ....................98
▫ UConnect™ System Features .............100
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity ............105
3
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
UConnect™ System ....................106
▫ General Information ...................114
m Seats ................................115
▫ 10–Way Driver’s Power Seat — If Equipped . . 115
▫ 8–Way Driver’s Power Seat — If Equipped . . . 116
▫ 4–Way Passenger’s Power Seat ............116
▫ Adjustable Head Restraints ..............117
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped .............118
▫ Second Row Manual Seat Recliner —
If Equipped .........................120
▫ Second Row Manual Seat Adjuster —
If Equipped .........................121
▫ Second Row Bench Seating —
If Equipped .........................122
▫ Second Row Fold & Tumble Seats —
If Equipped .........................123
▫ Third Row Easy Exit — If Equipped ........124
▫ Third Row Seating — If Equipped .........126
▫ Load Floor — If Equipped ...............127
▫ Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer .............128
m Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped .........129
▫ Easy Exit Seat (Available With Memory Seat
Only) ..............................132
▫ Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With
Memory Seat Only) — If Equipped .........133
m To Open And Close The Hood .............133
82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
m Lights ...............................134
▫ Overhead Console Map/Reading Lights .....134
▫ Interior Lights .......................135
▫ Multi-Function Lever ...................136
▫ Headlights, Parking Lights, Instrument Panel
Lights .............................136
▫ Automatic Headlights ..................137
▫ Daytime Running Lights (Canada Only) .....138
▫ Lights-On Reminder ...................138
▫ Headlight Time Delay ..................138
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped ...............138
▫ Turn Signals .........................139
▫ Highbeam/Lowbeam Select Switch .........139
▫ Passing Light ........................139
m Windshield Wipers And Washers ...........140
▫ Windshield Washers ...................140
▫ Mist Feature .........................140
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation .............141
▫ Intermittent Wiper System ...............141
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer .............141
m Tilt Steering Column ....................143
m Electronic Speed Control ..................144
▫ To Activate ..........................144
▫ To Set a Desired Speed .................145
▫ To Deactivate ........................145
▫ To Resume Speed .....................145
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83
3
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting ...............145
▫ To Accelerate For Passing ...............146
m Garage Door Opener — If Equipped .........146
▫ Programming HomeLinkt ...............147
▫ Canadian Programming/Gate Programming . .150
▫ Using HomeLinkt .....................151
▫ Reprogramming a Single HomeLinkt
Buttons ............................151
▫ Security ............................151
▫ Troubleshooting Tips ...................152
▫ General Information ...................152
m Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .............153
m Electronic Brake Control System -
ABS/TCS/BAS/ESP .....................154
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) ............154
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) ...............154
▫ ESP (Electronic Stability Program) .........155
m Adjustable Pedals — If Equipped ...........159
m Rear Park Sense System — If Equipped .......160
▫ Rear Park Assist Sensors ................161
▫ Rear Park Assist Warning Display .........162
▫ Enable/Disable The Rear Park Assist System —
If Equipped .........................165
▫ Service The Rear Park Assist System ........165
▫ Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System ......166
m Rear Camera — If Equipped ...............166
m Overhead Console — If Equipped ...........168
84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights ................168
▫ Sunglasses Storage ....................168
m Power Sunroof — If Equipped .............169
▫ Express Open Feature ..................170
▫ Wind Buffeting .......................171
▫ Sunroof Comfort Position — If Equipped ....171
▫ Sunroof Maintenance ...................172
m Electrical Power Outlets ..................172
▫ Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off .......173
m Cupholders ...........................174
▫ Front Seat Cupholders ..................174
▫ Second Row Seat Cupholders .............174
▫ Third Row Seat Cupholders — If Equipped . . .175
m Storage ..............................175
▫ Console Features ......................175
▫ Rear Cargo Storage Bin — If Equipped ......175
▫ Retractable Cargo Area Cover —
If Equipped .........................176
▫ Cargo Tie-Down Hooks .................177
m Roof Luggage Rack — If Equipped ..........178
m Load Leveling System ...................180
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85
3
MIRRORS
Inside Day / Night Mirror
Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear
window. A two point pivot system allows for horizontal
and vertical adjustment of the mirror.
Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the
small control under the mirror to the night position
(toward rear of vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted
while set in the day position (toward windshield).
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
When using this feature the mirror will automatically
adjust for annoying headlight glare from vehicles behind
you. You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the
button at the base of the mirror. A light will illuminate to
indicate when this feature is on.
MANUAL REARVIEW MIRROR
86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Driver’s Side Outside Mirror Auto Dimmer — If
Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for annoying headlight
glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn this feature
on or off by pressing the button at the base of the
Rearview Mirror.
Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature
All exterior mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
three detent positions; full forward, full rearward, and
normal.
Outside Mirror — Driver’s Side
Adjust the outside mirror to center on the adjacent lane of
traffic, with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the
inside mirror.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87
3
Outside Mirror — Passenger’s Side
Adjust the convex outside mirror so you can just see the
side of your vehicle in the portion of the mirror closest to
the vehicle. This type of mirror will give a much wider
view to the rear, and especially of the lane next to your
vehicle.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the right side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your right
side mirror could cause you to collide with another
vehicle or other object.
Use your inside mirror when judging the size or
distance of a vehicle seen in this convex mirror.
Power Remote-Control Mirrors
Use the mirror select switch, located on the driver’s door
trim panel above the power window switches, to adjust
the view obtained in the outside mirrors.
Power Mirror Switches
88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Press the rocker switch to the L or R for Left or Right
mirror selection. Use the center off position to guard
against accidentally moving a mirror position.
Select a mirror and press one of the four arrows for the
direction you want the mirror to move.
Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by
the optional Driver Memory Seat Feature. Refer to
“Driver Memory Seat” in section 3 of this manual.
Heated Remote Control Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature
is activated whenever you turn on the Rear Window
Defrost.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors
An illuminated vanity mirror is on the sun visor. To use
the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the
mirror cover upward. The lights turn on automatically.
Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights.
Sun Visor Extension
The sun visors may be pulled out to provide extended
coverage of the side glass.
HANDS–FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect™) —
IF EQUIPPED
UConnect™ is a voice-activated, hands-free, in- vehicle
communications system. UConnect™ allows you to dial
a phone number with your cellular phone using simple
voice commands (e.g., 9Call” { “Mike” {”Work9 or 9Dial”
{ “248-555-12129). Your cellular phone’s audio is trans-
mitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the system
will automatically mute your radio when using the
UConnect™ system.
NOTE: The UConnect™ system use requires a cellular
phone equipped with the Bluetooth 9Hands-Free Profile,9
version 0.96 or higher. See www.chrysler.com/uconnect
for supported phones.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89
3
UConnect™ allows you to transfer calls between the
system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your
vehicle, and enables you to mute the system’s micro-
phone for private conversation.
The UConnect™ phonebook enables you to store up to 32
names and four numbers per name. Each language has a
separate 32-name phonebook accessible only in that
language. This system is driven through your Blue-
tooth™ Hands-Free profile cellular phone. UConnect™
features Bluetooth™ technology - the global standard
that enables different electronic devices to connect to
each other without wires or a docking station, so UCon-
nect works no matter where you stow your cellular
phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as
your phone is turned on and has been paired to the
vehicle’s UConnect™ system. The UConnect™ system
allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to system.
Only one linked (or paired) cellular phone can be used
with the system at a time. The system is available in
English, Spanish, or French languages (as equipped).
The rearview mirror contains the microphone for the
system and the radio has the two control buttons that will
UConnect™ Switches
90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
enable you to access the system. Actual button location
may vary with radio. The individual buttons are de-
scribed in the “Operations” section.
The UConnect™ system can be used with any Hands-
Free Profile certified Bluetooth™ cellular phone. See
www.chrysler.com/uconnect for supported phones. If
your cellular phone supports a different profile (e.g.,
Headset Profile), you may not be able to use any UCon-
nect™ features. Refer to your cellular service provider or
the phone manufacturer for details.
The UConnect™ system is fully integrated with the
vehicle’s audio system. The volume of the UConnect™
system can be adjusted either from the radio volume
control knob, or from the steering wheel radio control
(right switch), if so equipped.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
the UConnect™ system such as 9CELL9 or caller ID on
certain radios.
Operations
Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect™
system and to navigate through the UConnect™ menu
structure. Voice commands are required after most
UConnect™ system prompts. You will be prompted for a
specific command and then guided through the available
options.
•
Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
the voice on beep, which follows the 9Ready9 prompt
or another prompt.
•
For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying 9Setup9 and then
9Phone Pairing,9 the following compound command
can be said: 9Setup Phone Pairing.9
•
For each feature explanation in this section, only the
combined form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
part of the command, when you are asked for it. For
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91
3
example, you can use the combined form voice com-
mand 9Phonebook New Entry,9 or you can break the
combined form command into two voice commands:
9Phonebook9 and 9New Entry.9 Please remember, the
UConnect™ system works best when you talk in a
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to some one
sitting eight feet away from you.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” at the end of this section.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options are at any prompt, say 9Help9 follow-
ing the voice on beep. The UConnect™ system will play
all the options at any prompt if you ask for help.
To activate the UConnect™ system from idle, simply
press the ’Phone’ button and follow audible prompts for
directions. All UConnect™ system sessions begin with a
press of the ’Phone’ button on the radio control head.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the voice on beep, you can say
9Cancel9 and you will be returned to the main menu.
However, in a few instances the system will take you
back to the previous menu.
Pair (Link) UConnect™ System to a Cellular Phone
To begin using your UConnect™ system, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth™ enabled cellular phone.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer-
ence your cellular phone owner’s manual. One of the
following vehicle specific websites may also provide
detailed instructions for pairing with the brand of phone
that you have:
NOTE:
•
www.chrysler.com/uconnect
•
www.dodge.com/uconnect
•
www.jeep.com/uconnect
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The following are general phone to UConnect™ System
pairing instructions:
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Setup Phone Pairing9 and follow the audible prompts.
•
When prompted, after the voice on beep, say 9Pair a
Phone9 and follow the audible prompts.
•
You will be asked to say a four-digit pin number,
which you will later need to enter into your cellular.
You can enter any four-digit pin number. You will not
need to remember this pin number after the initial
pairing process.
•
For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
give the UConnect™ system a name for your cellular
phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be
given a unique phone name.
•
You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a
priority level between 1 and 7, 1 being the highest
priority. You can pair up to seven cellular phones to
your UConnect™ system. However, at any given time,
only one cellular phone can be in use, connected to
your UConnect™ System. The priority allows the
UConnect™ system to know which cellular phone to
use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the
same time. For example, if priority 3 and priority 5
phones are present in the vehicle, the UConnect™
system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you
make a call. You can select to use a lower priority
cellular phone at any time (refer to 9Advanced Phone
Connectivity9).
Call/Dial by Saying a Number
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Dial.9
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93
3
•
System will prompt you to say the number you want
call.
•
For example, you can say 9234-567-8901.9 The phone
number that you enter must be of valid length and
combination. Based on the country in which the ve-
hicle was purchased, the UConnect™ limits the user
from dialing invalid combination of numbers. For
example, in USA, 234-567-890 is nine digits long,
which is not a valid USA phone number - the closest
valid phone number has ten digits.
•
The UConnect™ system will confirm the phone num-
ber and then dial. The number will appear in the
display of certain radios.
Call by Saying a Name
•
Press the “Phone” button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
“Dial” or Call.9
•
System will prompt you to say the name of the person
you want call.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
you can say 9John Doe,9 where John Doe is a previ-
ously stored name entry in the UConnect™ phone-
book. Refer to 9Add Names to Your UConnect™
Phonebook,9 to learn how to store a name in the
phonebook.
•
The UConnect™ system will confirm the name and
then dial the corresponding phone number, which
may appear in the display of certain radios.
Add Names to Your UConnect™ Phonebook
NOTE: Adding names to phonebook is recommended
when vehicle is not in motion.
•
Press the “Phone” button to begin.
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Phonebook New Entry.9
•
When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the voice recognition and is recom-
mended. For example, say 9Robert Smith9 or 9Robert9
instead of 9Bob.9
•
When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
9Home,99Work,99Mobile,9 or 9Pager9). This will allow
you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook
entry, if desired.
•
When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are adding.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phone-
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
main menu.
The UConnect™ system will allow you to enter up to 32
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
only in that language.
Edit Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when vehicle is not in motion.
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Phonebook Edit.9
•
You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
entry that you wish to edit.
•
Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
mobile, or pager) that you wish to edit.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
3
•
When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are editing.
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunities to edit another entry
in the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or
return to the main menu.
9Phonebook Edit9 can be used to add another phone
number to a name entry that already exists in the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
mobile and a home number, but you can add John Doe’s
work number later using the 9Phonebook Edit9 feature.
Delete Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when vehicle is not in motion.
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Phonebook Delete.9
•
After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
entry that you wish to delete or you can say 9List
Names9 to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
from the list, press the 9Voice Recognition9 button
while the UConnect™ system is playing the desired
entry and say 9Delete.9
•
After you enter the name, the UConnect™ system will
ask you which designation you wish to delete, home,
work, mobile, or pager. Say the designation you wish
to delete.
NOTE: Note that only the phonebook entry in the
current language is deleted.
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be de-
leted. Note that only the phonebook in the current
language is deleted.
Delete All Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Phonebook Erase All.9
•
The UConnect™ system will ask you to verify that you
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
•
After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
deleted.
•
Note that only the phone book in the current language
is deleted.
List All Names in the UConnect™ Phonebook
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Phonebook List Names.9
•
The UConnect™ system will play the names of all the
phonebook entries.
•
To call one of the names in the list, press the 9Voice
Recognition’ button during the playing of the desired
name, and then say 9Call.
NOTE: The user can also exercise 9Edit9 or 9Delete9
operations at this point.
•
The UConnect™ system will then prompt you as to
number designation you wish to call.
•
The selected number will be dialed.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
3
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
UConnect™ system if the feature(s) are available on your
cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the UConnect™ system. Check with
your cellular service provider for the features that you
have.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call
Currently in Progress
When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the
UConnect™ system will interrupt the vehicle audio
system, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
call. To reject the call, press and hold the ’Phone’ button
until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming
call was rejected.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call
Currently in Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your cell
phone. Press the ’Phone’ button to place the current call
on hold and answer the incoming call.
NOTE: The UConnect™ system compatible phones in
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
only either answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Making a Second Call while Current Call in
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently in a call,
press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say 9Dial9 or
9Call9 followed by the phone number or phonebook entry
you wish to call. The first call will be on hold while the
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
second call is in progress. To go back to the first call, refer
to 9Toggling Between Calls.9 To combine two calls, refer
to 9Conference Call.9
Place/Retrieve a Call from Hold
To put a call on hold, press the 8Phone’ button until you
hear a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold.
To bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
8Phone’ button until you hear a single beep.
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the ’Phone’ button until you hear a single beep
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at one
time.
Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press and hold the ’Phone’ button until you hear a
double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, press the ’Voice Recogni-
tion’ button while a call is in progress and make a second
phone call as described under 9Making a Second Call
while Current Call in Progress.9 After the second call has
established, press and hold the ’Phone’ button until you
hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have
been joined into one conference call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the 8Phone’
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
3
Redial
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Redial.9
•
The UConnect™ system will call the last number that
was dialed on your cellular phone.
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the
UConnect™ system.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is progression of a phone call on
UConnect™ system after the vehicle ignition key has
been switched to off. Call continuation functionality
available on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
•
After ignition key is switched off, a call can continue
on the UConnect™ system either until the call ends or
until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of
the call on the UConnect™ system and transfer of the
call to the mobile phone.
•
After ignition key is switched to off, a call can continue
on the UConnect™ system for certain duration, after
which the call is automatically transferred from the
UConnect™ system to the mobile phone.
•
An active call is automatically transferred to the
mobile phone after ignition key is switched to off.
UConnect™ System Features
Language Selection
To change the language that the UConnect™ system is
using,
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the language you wish to switch to
(English, Espanol, or Francais, if so equipped).
•
Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
language selection.
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
voice commands will be in that language.
NOTE: After every UConnect™ language change op-
eration, only the language specific 32-name phonebook is
usable. The paired phone name is not language specific
and usable across all languages.
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
•
Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect™ system
is operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Emergency9 and the UConnect™ system will instruct
the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num-
ber. This feature is only supported in the USA.
NOTE: The emergency number dialed is based on the
Country where the vehicle is purchased (911 for USAand
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may not
be applicable with the available cellular service and area.
The UConnect™ system does slightly lower your chances
of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cell
phone directly.
Your phone must be turned on and paired to the UCon-
nect™ system to allow use of this vehicle feature in
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
3
emergency situations when the cell phone has network
coverage and stays paired to the UConnect™ system.
Towing Assistance
If you need towing assistance,
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Towing Assistance.9
NOTE: The Towing Assistance number dialed is based
on the Country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-
528-2069 for USA, 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-3454
for Mexico city and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico
city in Mexico).
Please refer to the 24-Hour “Towing Assistance” cover-
age details in the Warranty information booklet and on
the 24–Hour Towing Assistance Card.
Paging
To learn how to page, refer to 9Working with Automated
Systems.9 Paging works properly except for pagers of
certain companies which time-out a little too soon to
work properly with the UConnect™ system.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to 9Working
with Automated Systems.9
Working with Automated Systems
This method is designed to be used in instances where
one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone
keypad while navigating through an automated tele-
phone system.
You can use your UConnect™ system to access a voice-
mail system or an automated service, such as, paging
service or automated customer service. Some services
require immediate response selection, in some instances,
that may be too quick for use of UConnect™ system.
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When calling a number with your UConnect™ system
that normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone
sequence on your cellular phone keypad, you can push
the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say the sequence you
wish to enter followed by the word 9Send.9 For example,
if required to enter your pin number followed with a
pound3746#,youcanpressthe’Voice Recognition’
button and say 93746#Send.9 Saying a number, or
sequence of numbers, followed by 9Send9 is also to be
used to navigate through an automated customer service
center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager.
Barge In - Overriding Prompts
The ’Voice Recognition’ button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
recognition command immediately. For example, if a
prompt is playing 9Would you like to pair a phone, clear
a{,9 you could press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and
say 9Pair a Phone9 to select that option without having to
listen to the rest of the voice prompt.
Turning Confirmation Prompts On/Off
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g., the UConnect™
system will not repeat a phone number before you dial
it).
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Setup Confirmations.9 The UConnect™ system will
play the current confirmation prompt status and you
will be given the choice to change it.
Phone and Network Status Indicators
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
your cell phone, the UConnect™ system will provide
notification to inform you of your phone and network
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
using UConnect™. The status is given for roaming net-
work signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
3
Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone
keypad and still use the UConnect™ system (while
dialing via the cell phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth™ cellular
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The UConnect™ system will work the
same as if you dial the number using voice recognition.
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the UConnect™ system to play it on the
vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this
situation, after successfully dialing a number, the user
may feel that the call did not go through even though the
call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will
hear the audio.
Mute/Un-mute (Mute off)
When you mute the UConnect™ system, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the UConnect™ system:
•
Press the ’Voice Recognition’ button.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Mute.9
In order to un-mute the UConnect™ system:
•
Press the ’Voice Recognition’ button.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Mute-off.9
Information Service
When using AT&T Wireless Service, dialing to phone
number 9#121,9 you can access voice activated automated
system to receive news, weather, stocks, traffic, etc.
related information. This is an AT&T provided service.
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone
The UConnect™ system allows on going calls to be
transferred from your cellular phone to the UConnect™
system without terminating the call. To transfer an ongo-
ing call from your UConnect™ paired cellular phone to
the UConnect™ system or vice-versa, press the ’Voice
Recognition’ button and say 9Transfer Call.9
Connect or Disconnect Link Between the
UConnect™ System and Cellular Phone
Your cellular phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively 9connected9
with one electronic device at a time.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Blue-
tooth™ connection between a UConnect™ paired cellular
phone and the UConnect™ system, then follow the
instruction described in your cellular phone user’s
manual.
List Paired Cellular Phone Names
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone pairing”.
•
When prompted, say 9List Phones.9
•
The UConnect™ system will play the phone names of
all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to
the lowest priority. To “select” or “delete” a paired
phone being announced, press the 8Voice recognition’
button and say “Select” or “Delete.” Also, see the next
two sections for an alternate way to “select” or “de-
lete” a paired phone.
Select another Cellular Phone
This feature allows you to select and start using another
phone with the UConnect™ system. The phone must
have been previously paired to the UConnect™ system
that you want to use it with.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
3
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Setup Select Phone9 and follow the prompts.
•
You can also press the 8Voice Recognition’ button
anytime while the list is being played, and then choose
the phone that you wish to select.
•
The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the UCon-
nect™ system will return to using the highest priority
phone present in or near (approximately with in 30
feet) the vehicle.
Delete UConnect™ Paired Cellular Phones
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Setup Phone Pairing.9
•
At the next prompt, say 9Delete9 and follow the
prompts.
•
You can also press the 8Voice Recognition’ button
anytime while the list is being played and then choose
the phone you wish to delete.
Things You Should Know About Your UConnect™
System
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-
nizing their voice commands or numbers, the UCon-
nect™ system Voice Training feature may be used. To
enter this training mode, follow one of the two proce-
dures:
From outside the UConnect™ mode (e.g. from radio
mode)
•
Press and hold the ‘Voice Recognition’ button for 5
seconds until the session begins, or,
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
Press the ‘Voice Recognition’ button and say 9Setup,
Voice Training9 command.
Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the
UConnect™ system. For best results, the Voice Training
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked,
engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched off.
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
To restore the Voice Recognition system to factory default
settings, enter the Voice Training session via the above
procedure and follow the prompts.
Voice Recognition (VR)
•
Always wait for the beep before speaking.
•
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting approximately eight (8) feet
away from you.
•
Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a voice recognition period.
•
Performance is maximized under:
•
low-to-medium blower setting,
•
low-to-medium vehicle speed,
•
low road noise,
•
smooth road surface,
•
fully closed windows,
•
dry weather condition.
•
Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish ac-
cents, the system may not always work for some.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
3
•
When navigating through an automated system, such
as voice mail, or when sending a page at the end of
speaking the digit string, make sure to say 9send.9
•
Storing names in phonebook when vehicle is not in
motion is recommended.
•
It is not recommended to store similar sounding
names in the UConnect™ phonebook.
•
UConnect™ phonebook nametag recognition rate is
optimized for the voice of the person who stored the
name in the phonebook.
•
You can say 9O9 (letter 9O9) for 909 (zero). 98009 must be
spoken 9eight-zero-zero.9
•
Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
Far End Audio Performance
•
Audio quality is maximized under:
•
low-to-medium blower setting.
•
low-to-medium vehicle speed.
•
low road noise.
•
smooth road surface.
•
fully closed windows.
•
dry weather condition.
•
operation from driver seat.
•
Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
not the UConnect™ system.
•
Echo at far end can sometime be reduced by lowering
the in-vehicle audio volume.
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Bluetooth Communication Link
Occasionally, Cellular phones have been found to lose
connection to the UConnect™ system. When this hap-
pens, the connection can generally be re-established by
switching the phone off/on. Your cell phone is recom-
mended to remain in Bluetooth 9on9 mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either ON
or ACC position, or after a reset, you must wait at least
five (5) seconds prior to using the system.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
3
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
3
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
North American English
Primary Alternate(s)
Zero Oh
One
Two
Three
Four
Five
Six
Seven
Eight
Nine
Star (*)
Plus (+)
Pound (#)
Add Location Add New
All All of them
North American English
Call
Cancel
Confirmation Prompts
Continue
Delete
Dial
Edit
Emergency
English
Erase All
Espanol
Francais
Help
Home
Language
List names
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
3
North American English
List phones
Mobile
Mute
Mute off
New entry
No
Pager
Pair a phone
Phone pairing Pairing
Phonebook Phone book
Previous
Record again
Redial
Return to main menu Return. Main menu
Select phone Select
Send
North American English
Set up Phone settings / Phone
set up
Towing assistance
Transfer call
Try again
Work
Yes
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
SEATS
10–Way Driver’s Power Seat — If Equipped
The driver’s power seat switches are located on the
driver’s front door trim panel. The bottom switch con-
trols up/down, forward/rearward, and tilt adjustment.
The top switch controls the seatback recline adjustment
and the middle switch controls the lumbar adjustment.
10–Way Driver’s Power Seat
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
3
WARNING!
Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured.
8–Way Driver’s Power Seat — If Equipped
The driver’s power seat switches are located on the
driver’s front door trim panel. The bottom switch con-
trols up/down, forward/rearward, and tilt adjustment.
The top switch controls the seatback recline adjustment.
4–Way Passenger’s Power Seat
The front passenger power seat switches are located on
the passenger front door trim panel. The bottom switch
controls forward and rearward adjustment. The top
switch controls the seatback recline adjustment.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Adjustable Head Restraints
Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in
the event of impact from the rear. Pull up or push down
on the head restraint so that the upper edge is as high as
practical. To raise the head restraint, pull up on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, depress the release
tab located at the base of the head restraint and push
down on the head restraint.
Adjustable Head Restraints
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
3
Heated Seats — If Equipped
This feature heats the driver, front passenger and second
row seats. The controls for the front heated seats are
located on the door trim panel next to the power seat
switches.
Press the switch once to select a heat setting (high or low)
and press the switch a second time in the same direction
to turn the heated seat off. The indicator light will show
when LOW or HIGH heat is ON.
The controls for the second row heated seats are located
on the center console between the seats. Press the switch
once to select a heat setting (high or low) and press the
switch a second time in the same direction to turn the
heated seat off. The indicator light will show when LOW
or HIGH heat is ON.
Front Heated Seat Switch
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•
If the lights in the second row heated seat switch begin
to flash when the switch is pressed, it indicates that the
heated seat is not functioning properly and that ser-
vice is required. See your authorized dealer for service.
•
Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within
2 to 3 minutes.
•
The heated seats will turn off when the ignition switch
is turned to the OFF position.
Rear Heated Seat Switches
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
3
Second Row Manual Seat Recliner — If Equipped
The recliner mechanism control is on the outboard side of
the seat. To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever,
then push back to the desired position and release the
lever. Lean forward and lift the lever to return the
seatback to its normal position. Using body pressure, lean
forward and rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback
has latched.
NOTE: When using the recliner mechanism with the 3rd
row seat folded down, the second row seat may need to
be adjusted forward to achieve full recline.
Seatback Release Lever
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and
be seriously or fatally injured. Use the recliner only
when the vehicle is parked.
Second Row Manual Seat Adjuster — If Equipped
The adjusting bar is located under the front of the seat.
Pull the bar up and move the seat to the desired position.
Release the bar to lock the seat into position.
Using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the
seat to be sure the seat adjusters have latched.
Second Row Manual Seat Adjuster
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
3
WARNING!
Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The seat belt might not be properly
adjusted and you could be injured.
Second Row Bench Seating — If Equipped
The second row seats may be used with either or both
seatbacks folded forward for additional storage space.
To fold the seat, remove any objects from in front of or on
the seat. Then pull handle located on the seatback and
push the seatback forward.
To raise the second row seat, lift up on the seatback and
push rearward until the seatback is latched. Move the
seatback forward to be sure the seatback is fully latched.
Seatback Release Handle
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Be sure there is nothing in front of the second row
seat cushion before folding it down. Damage to the
seat may occur.
Second Row Fold & Tumble Seats — If Equipped
The second row seats can be folded and tumbled forward
for easy access to the third seat or rear cargo area.
To fold and tumble the seat, follow these steps:
1. Remove any obstructions from the floor in front of the
seat.
2. Lower the head restraint to its full downward position
and rotate the arm rest to the upright position.
3. Move the seat to the full rear position.
4. Pull up on the seatback release lever located on the
outboard side of the seat labeled “1” and fold the
seatback down.
To assure the seatback is latched in the folded position,
additional downward pressure on the seatback may be
required when folding.
Seatback Release Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
3
5. Pull up on the release handle labeled “2” and lift
firmly to tumble the seat fully forward. If the seat
contacts the rear of the front seat, move the front seat
forward.
To relatch the seat, tilt the seat rearward and push down
firmly to engage the rear attachments. Then lift the
seatback release lever labeled “1” and pull the seatback
up to return it to its full upright position.
WARNING!
In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could be
injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor
attachments. Always be sure the seats are fully
latched.
Third Row Easy Exit — If Equipped
For passengers sitting in the third row seats, the second
row seats can be folded and tumbled forward for easy
exit.
Seat Release Handle
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To fold and tumble the seat forward, follow these steps:
1. Pull up on the seatback release handle “1” located on
the back of the seat to fold the seatback down.
2. Pull the release strap “2” located at the bottom of the
seat to lift and tumble the seat forward.
To relatch the seat, tilt the seat rearward and push down
firmly to engage the rear attachments. Then lift the
seatback release lever labeled “1” and pull the seatback
up to return it to its full upright position.
Release Handle 1 Location
Release Strap 2 Location
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
3
Third Row Seating — If Equipped
The third row seats may be used with either or both
seatbacks folded forward for additional storage space.
To fold the seat, remove any objects from in front of or on
the seat. Then pull handle located on the seatback and
push it forward.
WARNING!
Do not sit in the 3rd row seat with the second row
seatbacks folded or with the second row seats folded
and tumbled. In a collision, you could slide under the
seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured.
To raise the 3rd row seat, lift up on the seatback and push
rearward until the seatback is latched. Move the seatback
forward to be sure the seatback is fully latched.
CAUTION!
Be sure there is nothing in front of the 3rd row seat
cushion before folding it down. Damage to the seat
may occur.
Seat Release Handle
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Not all head restraints in this vehicle are the same.
Head restraints from one seating position should
not be removed and installed in any other seating
position. In a collision, serious injury or death may
result if the proper head restraint is not installed on
each seat.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle should not
be used as a play area by children. They could be
seriously injured in a collision. Children should be
seated and using the proper restraint system.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Load Floor — If Equipped
For additional cargo space, the second and third row
seatbacks may be folded forward and the load floor
extended to cover the center console.
To extend the load floor, follow these steps:
1. Move the second row seats to the full rear position.
2. Fold the second and third row seatbacks down.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
3
3. Pull on the load floor strap and lift the panel from the
driver’s second row seatback over the center console and
onto the passenger second row seat.
NOTE: Be sure to reattach the strap to secure the load
floor panel when not in use.
Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer
Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag
handles are built into the seatbacks of all front seats. The
floor supports the partial weight of the bagged goods.
Load Floor Panel
Grocery Bag Holders
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with memory systems, your
remote keyless entry transmitter or memory seat buttons
on the driver’s door panel can be used to recall the
driver’s seat, outside mirrors, adjustable pedals (if
equipped) and radio station presets to saved positions.
The memory seat buttons located on the driver’s door
will always recall stored settings. The remote keyless
entry transmitter can be programmed to recall positions
when the UNLOCK button is pressed. Refer to the
following procedure on how to link a remote keyless
entry transmitter to a position.
NOTE: The vehicle must be in Park to recall memory
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not
in Park, a message will be displayed in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).
To recall memory positions press memory button number
1 if you are recalling the memory position for driver one
or press memory button number 2 if you are recalling the
memory position for driver two. A recall can be cancelled
by pressing any of the memory buttons during a recall.
When a recall is cancelled, the seat stops moving and a
delay of approximately one second will occur before any
other recalls can be selected.
Driver Memory Switches
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
3
Your vehicle has been delivered with two remote keyless
entry transmitters. One or both transmitters can be linked
to either memory position. Up to eight remote keyless
entry transmitters can be used with your vehicle. The
memory seat system can also accommodate up to eight
transmitters linked to either of the two stored seat
positions or any combination of the two positions.
To Program Memory Seat Buttons & RKE
Transmitters, Follow These Steps:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Select Remote Linked to Memory from the EVIC and
enter “Yes”.
3. Use the seat, mirror and adjustable pedal switches to
adjust the seat, recliner, side view mirrors and adjustable
pedals to the desired positions.
4. Set the radio station presets.
5. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and
remove the key.
6. Press and release the SET (S) button located on the
driver’s door. A light in the button will flash telling you
that you are in the set memory mode. You have five
seconds to complete the next step.
7. Within 5 seconds, press and release button 1 or 2 on
the driver’s door. A chime will sound signaling you that
the driver memory has been set. A message will also be
displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC), indicating a position has been set.
8. Within 5 seconds, press and release the LOCK button
on one of the Remote Keyless Entry Transmitters. A
chime will sound signaling you that the transmitter has
been successfully linked. A message will also be dis-
played in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC), indicating the transmitter has been linked.
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Repeat the above steps for the second position using the
other driver’s door numbered button and Remote Key-
less Entry Transmitter.
Each time the SET (S) button and a numbered button are
pressed, you erase the old memory and store a new one.
To Disable A Transmitter Link, Follow These Steps:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Select “Remote Linked To Memory” from the Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), Customer Pro-
grammable features and enter “YES.”.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and
remove the key.
4. Press and release the SET(S) button located on the
driver’s door. A light in the button will flash telling you
that you are in the set memory mode. You have five
seconds to complete the next step.
5. Within 5 seconds, press and release button 1 or 2 on
the driver’s door. A chime will sound signaling you that
the driver memory has been set. A message will also be
displayed in the EVIC, indicating a position has been set.
6. Within 5 seconds, press and release the UNLOCK
button on the remote keyless entry transmitters. A chime
will sound signaling you that the transmitter link has
been successfully disabled. A message will also be dis-
played in the EVIC, indicating the transmitter has been
disabled.
To disable another transmitter from memory positions 1
or 2, repeat the above steps for each transmitter.
NOTE: This function can be selected using the “Cus-
tomer Programmable Features” in the EVIC section,
otherwise see your authorized dealer for assistance.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
3
Easy Exit Seat (Available with Memory Seat Only)
This feature provides automatic driver’s seat positioning
which will enhance driver mobility out of and into the
vehicle.
There are two possible Easy Exit and Easy Entry adjust-
ments available:
•
The seat cushion will move rearward approximately
2.5 inches (60 mm) if the starting position of the seat is
greater than or equal to 4.72 inches (120 mm) forward
of the rear seat stop when the key is removed from the
ignition switch. The seat will then move forward
approximately 2.5 inches (60 mm) when the key is
placed into the ignition and turned out of the LOCK
position.
•
The seat shall move to the position located 1 1/8
inches (30 mm) forward of the rear stop if the starting
position is between 2.5 inches to 4.72 inches (60 mm to
120 mm) forward of the rear stop when the key is
removed from the ignition switch. The seat will move
forward to the memory/driving position when the
key is placed into the ignition and turned out of the
LOCK position.
The Easy Entry and Easy Exit feature will be automati-
cally disabled if the seat is already positioned closer than
2.5 inches (60 mm) forward of the rear stop. At this
position there is no benefit to the driver by moving the
seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
Entry and Easy Exit position.
NOTE: The Easy Exit Seat feature is not enabled when
the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy Exit
Seat feature can be enabled or disabled through the
customer programmable features in the Electronic Ve-
hicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Easy Exit
Seat?” under “Use Factory Settings”.
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Tilt Mirrors in Reverse (Available with Memory
Seat Only) — If Equipped
This additional feature provides automatic outside mir-
ror positioning which will aid the driver’s view of the
ground rearward of the front doors. The outside mirrors
will move slightly downward from the present position
when the vehicle is shifted into the Reverse position. The
outside mirrors will then return to the original position
when the vehicle is shifted out of Reverse position. Each
stored memory setting will have an associated Tilt Mir-
rors in Reverse position.
NOTE: The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not en-
abled when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Mirrors in
Reverse feature can be enabled or disabled through the
customer programmable features in the Electronic Ve-
hicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Tilt Mirrors in
Reverse?” under “Use Factory Settings”.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released. First pull
the hood release lever located under the left side of the
instrument panel.
Hood Release Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
3
Next, push to the left the safety catch located under the
front edge of the hood, near the center.
Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open
position.
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open approximately 15
cm (6 inches) and then drop it. This should secure both
latches. Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully
closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
If the hood is not fully latched, it could fly up when
the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision.
You could have a collision. Be sure all hood latches
are fully latched before driving.
LIGHTS
Overhead Console Map/Reading Lights
These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the
overhead console. Each light is turned ON by pressing
the lens. Press the lens a second time to turn the light
Hood Safety Catch
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
OFF. The lights also turn on when a door is opened or the
dimmer control is turned fully upward, past the second
detent.
NOTE: The lights will remain on until the switch is
pressed a second time, so be sure they have been turned
off before leaving the vehicle.
Interior Lights
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
The interior lights will automatically turn off in about 15
minutes if a door is left open or the dimmer control is left
in the Dome light position. Turn the ignition switch ON
to restore the interior light operation.
Map/Reading Lights
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
3
Multi-Function Lever
The Multi-Function Lever controls the operation of the
headlights, parking lights, turn signals, headlight beam
selection, instrument panel light dimming, interior lights,
the passing lights, and fog lights. The lever is located on
the left side of the steering column.
Headlights, Parking Lights, Instrument Panel
Lights
Turn the end of the Multi-Function Lever to the first
detent for parking light and instrument panel light
operation. Turn to the second detent for headlight, park
light and instrument panel light operation.
To change the brightness of the instrument panel lights,
rotate the center portion of the Multi-Function Lever up
or down.
Dimmer Control
With the parking lights or headlights
on, rotating the dimmer control for the
interior lights on the Multi-Function
Lever upward will increase the bright-
ness of the instrument panel lights.
Multi-Function Control Lever
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Dome Light Position
Rotate the dimmer control completely
upward to the second detent to turn
on the interior lights. The interior
lights will remain on when the dim-
mer control is in this position.
Interior light Defeat (OFF)
Rotate the dimmer control to the ex-
treme bottom “OFF” position. The in-
terior lights will remain off when the
doors are open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the dimmer control upward to
the first detent. This feature brightens
the odometer and radio display when
the parking lights or headlights are on
during daylight conditions.
Automatic Headlights
This system automatically turns your headlights ON or
OFF based on ambient light levels. To turn the system
ON, turn the end of the Multi-Function Lever to the third
detent position. When the system is ON, the Headlight
Time Delay feature is also ON. This means your head-
lights will stay ON for up to 90 seconds after you turn the
ignition switch OFF. To turn the Automatic System OFF,
turn the end of the Multi-Function Lever to the OFF
position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
3
NOTE: The engine must be running before the head-
lights will come ON in the Automatic mode.
Daytime Running Lights (Canada Only)
The high beam headlights will come on as Daytime
Running Lights whenever the ignition switch is on, the
headlights are off, and the parking brake is off. The
headlight switch must be used for normal night time
driving.
Lights-on Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is turned OFF, a chime will sound to alert the driver
when the driver’s door is opened.
Headlight Time Delay
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for up to 90 seconds, when leaving your vehicle in an
unlighted area.
To activate the delay feature, turn off the ignition switch
while the headlights are still on. Then turn off the
headlights within 45 seconds. The 90 second delay inter-
val begins when headlight switch is turned off. If the
headlights or park lights are turned back on or the
ignition switch is turned on, the delay will be cancelled.
If the headlights are turned off before the ignition, they
will turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE: The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds
of turning the ignition off to activate this feature
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is on the Multi-Function
Lever. To activate the front fog lights, turn on the
parking lights or the low beam headlights and pull
out the end of the Multi-Function Lever.
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The fog lights will only operate with the head-
lights on low beam. Selecting high beam headlights will
turn off the fog lights.
Turn Signals
Move the lever up or down to signal a right-hand or
left-hand turn.
The arrow on either side of the instrument cluster flashes
to indicate the direction of the turn, and proper operation
of the front and rear turn signal lights. If an indicator fails
to light when the lever is moved, it would suggest that
the switch or indicator lamp is defective.
If a defective bulb or wiring circuit is detected for the
turn signal system, the arrow indicators will flash at a
faster rate.
You can signal a lane change by moving the lever
partially up or down.
NOTE: If a turn signal has been left on for at least a mile
duration, a continuous chime will sound.
Turn Signal Lane Change Auto-Mode
Momentarily engage the multifunction control lever par-
tially up or down to activate the lane change feature
without holding the lever. The signal will flash 3 times,
and automatically turn off.
Highbeam/Lowbeam Select Switch
Pull the Multi-Function Lever towards you to switch the
headlights to HIGH beam. Pull the Lever a second time
to switch the headlights to LOW beam.
Passing Light
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the Multi-Function Lever toward you.
This will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam
and remain on until the lever is released.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
3
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch
on the control lever. The lever is located on the
right side of the steering column. Rotate the end
of the control lever to select the desired wiper speed.
Windshield Washers
To use the front washer, pull the lever toward you and
hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in
the delay range, the wiper will operate for two wipe
cycles after the lever is released, and then resume the
intermittent interval previously selected.
If the lever is pulled while in the OFF position, the wipers
will operate for two wipe cycles, then turn OFF.
Mist Feature
Push down on the wiper lever to activate a single wipe to
clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle. As
long as the lever is held down, the wipers will continue
to operate.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Control
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever to the second detent for Low
speed wiper operation, or to the third detent for High
speed operation
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause be-
tween cycles, desirable. Rotate the end of the lever to the
first detent position, then turn the end of the lever to
select the desired delay interval. The delay can be regu-
lated from a maximum of approximately 23 seconds
between cycles, to a cycle every second.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
The switch on the right side of the steering column also
controls operation of the rear wiper/washer function.
Rotating the center of the switch up to the DEL (Delay)
position or the ON position will activate the rear wiper.
Push the lever forward to initiate the rear wash function
in any of the three positions. The washer pump will
Windshield Wiper/Washer Control
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
3
continue to operate as long as the lever is pressed. Upon
release, the rear wiper will cycle two times before return-
ing to the set position.
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
rear window washer is shared. It is located in the front of
the engine compartment on the driver’s side and should
be checked for fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the
reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator
antifreeze) and operate the system for a few seconds to
flush out the residual water.
The washer fluid reservoir will hold a full gallon of fluid
when Low Washer Fluid illuminates in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).
Washer Fluid Reservoir
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
TILT STEERING COLUMN
To tilt the column, pull the lever, located behind the turn
signal control, toward you and move the steering wheel
up or down, as desired. Release the lever to lock the
steering wheel firmly in place.
WARNING!
Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is
moving is dangerous. Without a stable steering col-
umn, you could lose control of the vehicle and have
an accident. Adjust the column only while the ve-
hicle is stopped. Be sure it is locked before driving.
Tilt Steering Column Control
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
3
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, this device takes over the accelerator
operation at speeds greater than 30 mph (50 km/h). The
speed control switches are located on the steering wheel.
To Activate:
Push the “ON/OFF” button once and the CRUISE indi-
cator located near the instrument cluster odometer will
illuminate showing the electronic speed control system is
on. To turn the system OFF, push the “ON/OFF” button
again and the system and indicator will turn off.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidently
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you aren’t using it.
SPEED CONTROL BUTTONS
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Set a Desired Speed:
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press
and release the “SET” button. Release the accelerator and
the vehicle will operate at the selected speed. The
CRUISE SET indicator located near the instrument clus-
ter odometer will illuminate showing the electronic
speed control is set.
NOTE: While in the AutoStick mode, Speed Control will
only function in third or fourth gear (4 speed AutoStick)
and fifth or sixth gear (6 speed AutoStick).
To Deactivate:
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the “CANCEL”
button or normal braking while slowing the vehicle will
deactivate the speed control without erasing the memory.
Pushing the “ON/OFF” button to the OFF position or
turning off the ignition erases the speed memory.
To Resume Speed:
To resume a previously set speed, push and release the
“ACCEL/RESUME” button. Resume can be used at any
speed above 25 mph (40 km/h).
To Vary the Speed Setting:
When the speed control is set, speed can be increased by
pressing and holding the “ACCEL/RESUME” button.
When the button is released, a new set speed will be
established.
Tapping the “ACCEL/RESUME” button once will result
in a 2 mph (3 km/h) speed increase. Each time the button
is tapped, speed increases so that tapping the button
three times will increase speed by 6 mph (10 km/h), etc.
To decrease speed while speed control is set, press and
hold the “COAST” button. Release the button when the
desired speed is reached, and the new speed will be set.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
3
Tapping the “COAST” button once will result ina1mph
(2 km/h) speed decrease. Each time the button is tapped,
speed decreases.
To Accelerate For Passing:
Depress the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
NOTE: The speed control system maintains speed up
and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills
is normal.
Four speed automatic transmissions will experience a
downshift to 3rd gear (5th gear on 6 speed AutoStick)
while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This
downshift to 3rd (5th gear on 6 speed AutoStick) gear is
necessary to maintain vehicle set speed.
On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without speed control.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
can’t maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control. An accident could be the result. Don’t use
Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, or slippery.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLinkt replaces up to three remote controls (hand
held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting, or home security
systems. The HomeLinkt unit operates off of your vehi-
cle’s battery.
NOTE: HomeLinkt is disabled when the Vehicle Theft
Alarm is active.
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the Universal Transceiver. Do
not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the
path of the door or gate. Only use this transceiver
with a garage door opener that has a “stop and
reverse” feature as required by federal safety stan-
dards. This includes most garage door opener models
manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage door
opener without these safety features. Call toll-free
1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for safety information or
assistance.
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a danger-
ous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while
training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause seri-
ous injury or death.
Programming HomeLinkT
Before You Begin
If you have not trained any of the HomeLinkt buttons,
erase all channels before you begin training.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for 20
seconds until the red HomeLinkt indicator begins to
flash, or the EVIC message changes from “CLEARING
CHANNELS” to “CHANNELS CLEARED.”
It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the
hand-held transmitter of the device being programmed
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
3
to HomeLinkt for more efficient training and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage
while training.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1–3 inches (3–8 cm)
from the HomeLinkt buttons while keeping the indicator
in view.
For optimal training, point the battery end of the hand-
held transmitter away from the HomeLinkt.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen
HomeLinkt button and the hand-held transmitter button
until the until the red HomeLinkt indicator changes from
a slow to a rapid flash rate or the EVIC display changes
from “CHANNEL # TRAINING” to “CHANNEL #
TRAINED.”
Then release both the HomeLinkt and hand-held trans-
mitter buttons.
If the EVIC display states “DID NOT TRAIN” repeat
Step 3. If the signal is too weak, replace the battery in the
original hand-held transmitter.
It may take up to 30 seconds, or longer in rare cases. The
garage door may open & close while you train.
NOTE: Some gate operators and garage door openers
may require you to replace Step #3 with procedures
noted in the “Gate Operator/Canadian Programming”
section.
4. Press and hold the newly-trained HomeLinkt button.
If the channel has been trained, the EVIC display will
now state “CHANNEL # TRANSMIT.”
If the EVIC display still states “CHANNEL # TRAIN-
ING” repeat Step 3.
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If the red HomeLinkt indicator blinks rapidly for two
seconds and then remains constant, continue with the
next section: “Programing A Rolling Code.”
NOTE: After training a HomeLinkt channel, if the
garage door does not operate with HomeLinkt and the
garage door opener was manufactured after 1995, the
garage door opener may have a rolling code. If so,
proceed to the heading “Programming A Rolling Code
System.”
5. PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM
At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the “learn” or “training” button.
This can usually be found where the hanging antenna
wire is attached to the garage door opener motor (IT IS
NOT THE BUTTON NORMALLY USED TO OPEN
AND CLOSE THE DOOR).
6. Firmly press and release the “learn” or “training”
button. The name and color of the button may vary by
manufacturer.
NOTE: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the “Learn” button has been pressed.
1 — Garage Door Opener
2 — Training Button
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
3
7. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLinkt button twice (holding the button for 2 sec-
onds each time). If the device is plugged in and activates,
programming is complete.
If the device does not activate, press the button a third
time (for 2 seconds) to complete the training.
NOTE: If you are have any problems, or require assis-
tance, please call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the
Internet at www.HomeLink.com for information or assis-
tance.
To program the remaining two HomeLinkt buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
ERASE THE CHANNELS.
Canadian Programming/Gate Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter sig-
nals to 9time-out9 (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission which may not be long enough for
HomeLinkt to pick up the signal during programming.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to 9time-out9 in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
If you are having difficulties programming a garage door
opener or a gate operator, replace “Programming
HomeLink” Step 3 with the following:
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLinkt button
while you press and release - every two seconds
(“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter until HomeLinkt
has successfully accepted the frequency signal. The red
HomeLinkt indicator will change from a slow to rapid
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
flash, and the EVIC display in the cluster will change
from “CHANNEL # TRAINING” to “CHANNEL #
TRAINED.”
If you unplugged the device for training, plug it back in
at this time.
Then proceed with the remaining steps.
Using HomeLinkT
To operate, simply press and release the programmed
HomeLinkt button. Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator,
security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
etc.). The hand-held transmitter of the device may also be
used at any time.
Reprogramming a Single HomeLinkT Buttons
To re-program a channel that has been previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLinkt button for 20
seconds until the red indicator starts to flash, or the EVIC
display states “CHANNEL # TRAINING.”DO NOT
RELEASE THE BUTTON.
3. WITHOUT RELEASING THE BUTTON, proceed
with PROGRAMMING HOMELINK Step #2 and fol-
low all remaining steps.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
3
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for 20
seconds until the EVIC message states “CHANNELS
CLEARED.” Note that all channels will be erased. Indi-
vidual channels cannot be erased.
The HomeLinkt Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Theft Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLinkt, here
are some of the most common solutions:
•
Replace the battery in the original transmitter.
•
Press the Learn Button on the Garage Door Opener to
complete the training for Rolling Code.
•
Did you unplug the device for training, and remember
to plug it back in?
If you are have any problems, or require assistance,
please call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation
NOTE: The transmitter has been tested and it complies
with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The term “IC” before the certification/registration num-
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifi-
cations were met.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
ABS aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under
adverse braking conditions. The system controls hydrau-
lic brake pressure to prevent wheel lockup and help
avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
NOTE: ABS improves steering control of the vehicle
during hard braking maneuvers.
WARNING!
•
ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that af-
forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and
tires or the traction afforded.
•
ABS cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only
a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent
accidents.
•
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
3
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM -
ABS/TCS/BAS/ESP
Your vehicle is equipped with the advanced electronic
brake control system that includes Anti-Lock Brake Sys-
tem (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS) Brake Assist
System (BAS), and Electronic Stability Program (ESP).All
four systems work together to enhance vehicle stability
and control in various driving conditions, and are com-
monly referred to as ESP.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS system functions similar to
a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin
across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine
torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sens-
ing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous brak-
ing pressure during the stopping sequence. Do not
reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer
desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
traction afforded.
•
The BAS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
•
The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
ESP (Electronic Stability Program)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESP cor-
rects for over/under steering of the vehicle by applying
the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counter-
acting the over/under steer condition. Engine power
may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the
desired path. ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine
the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it
to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path
does not match the intended path, ESP applies the brake
of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the
oversteer or understeer condition.
•
Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
•
Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
3
ESP/TCS Indicator Light
The “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” located in the instrument
cluster, starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and
the ESP system becomes active. The “ESP/TCS Indicator
Light” also flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESP/TCS
Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease
up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as
possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road conditions.
WARNING!
•
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions.
•
ESP cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a
safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent
accidents.
•
The capabilities of an ESP-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ESP Operating Modes
The ESP system has 2 available operating modes.
ESP ON
This is the normal operating mode for ESP. Whenever the
vehicle is started the ESP system will be in this mode.
This mode should be used for most driving situations.
ESP should only be turned to “Partial ESP” for specific
reasons as noted below.
PARTIAL ESP
This mode is entered by momentarily depressing the
“ESP OFF” button.
When in “Partial ESP” mode, the TCS portion of ESP has
been disabled, the thresholds for ESP activation are
Traction Control Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
3
raised, and the “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” will be illu-
minated. This mode is intended to be used for a more
spirited driving experience, or if the vehicle is in deep
snow, sand, or gravel conditions and more wheel spin
that ESP would normally allow is required.
To turn ESP on again, momentarily depress the
“ESP OFF” button.
WARNING!
In the Partial ESP mode, the engine torque reduction
and stability features are desensitized. Therefore, the
enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP is
unavailable.
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial ESP”
mode by pressing the “ESP OFF” button. Once the
situation requiring ESP to be switched to the “Partial
ESP” mode is overcome, turn ESP back on by momen-
tarily depressing the “ESP OFF” button. This may be
done while the vehicle is in motion.
ESP/BAS Warning Light and ESP/TCS Indicator
Light
The malfunction indicator for the ESP is combined with
the BAS indicator. The yellow “ESP/BAS Warning
Lamp” and the yellow “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” in the
instrument cluster both come on when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position. They should both
go out with the engine running. If the “ESP/BAS Warn-
ing Lamp” comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in either the
ESP or BAS system, or both. If this light remains on after
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h),
see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•
The “ESP Indicator Light” and the “ESP/BAS Warning
Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition
switch is turned ON.
•
Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESP System
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
•
The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the
maneuver that caused the ESP activation.
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows both the brake and accelerator pedals
to move toward or away from the driver to provide
improved position with the steering wheel. The adjust-
able pedal system is designed to allow a greater range of
driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat position.
The switch is located on the drivers door trim panel next
to the power seat switches.
Press the switch forward to move the pedals forward
(toward the front of the vehicle).
Press the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward
(toward the driver).
•
The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
ADJUSTABLE PEDAL SWITCH
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
3
•
The pedals can be adjusted while driving.
•
The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in R
(Reverse) or when the Speed Control is ON. Amessage
will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) if the pedals are attempted to be ad-
justed when the system is locked out (“Adjustable
Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control Engaged” or “Ad-
justable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse”).
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with memory seat
feature, your remote keyless entry transmitter or memory
seat buttons on the driver’s door panel can be used to
recall the adjustable pedals to saved positions.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals
or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become lim-
ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the
adjustable pedal’s path.
REAR PARK SENSE SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Rear Park Assist System provides visual and audible
indications of the distance between the rear fascia and the
detected obstacle when backing up. When backing up the
driver should also use the inside rearview and outside
mirrors.
The Rear Park Assist System will remember the last
system state (enabled or disabled) from the last ignition
cycle when the ignition is changed to the RUN/ON
position.
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The Rear Park Assist System can be active only when the
transaxle shift lever is in R (Reverse). If the Rear Park
Assist System is enabled at this shift position, the system
will be active until the vehicle speed is increased to
approximately 11 mph (18 km/h) or above. The system
will be active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to
speeds less than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h).
Rear Park Assist Sensors
The four Rear Park Assist Sensors, located in the rear
fascia, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within
the sensors’ field of view. The monitored area seems oval
in shape. The sensors can detect obstacles from approxi-
mately 11.8 inches (30 cm) up to 59 inches (150 cm) from
the rear fascia in the horizontal direction, depending on
the location and orientation of the obstacle and the type
of obstacle.
Rear Park Assist LEDs
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
3
Rear Park Assist Warning Display
The Rear Park Assist Warning Display, located in the
headliner near the liftgate glass, provides both visual and
audible warnings to indicate the distance between the
rear fascia and the detected obstacle.
When the ignition is changed to the RUN/ON position,
the warning display will turn ON all of its LEDs for
about 1 second. Each side of the warning display has 6
yellow and 2 red LEDs. The vehicle is close to the obstacle
when the red LED is ON.
The driver can view the LEDs either through the rear
view mirror or by looking at the display above the rear
window.
The system dimly illuminates the two outer most yellow
LEDs when it is ON and detecting no obstacles. The
following chart shows the warning display operation
when the system is detecting an obstacle:
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING DISPLAY DISTANCES
DISPLAY LED OBSTACLE DISTANCE FROM: LED COLOR AUDIBLE SIGNAL
REAR CORNERS REAR CENTER
1st LED 78.7 in. (200 cm) Yellow Yes, half second
2nd LED 51.2 in. (130 cm) Yellow None
3rd LED 45.3 in. (115 cm) Yellow None
4th LED 31.5 in. (80 cm) 39.3 in. (100 cm) Yellow None
5th LED 25.5 in. (65 cm) 33.5 in. (85 cm) Yellow None
6th LED 20 in. (50 cm) 27.6 in. (70 cm) Yellow None
7th LED 16 in. (40 cm) 19.7 in. (50 cm) Red Red Yes, intermittent
8th LED 6 in. (15 cm) 11.8 in. (30 cm) Red Yes, continuous
NOTE: The Rear Park Sense System will MUTE the
radio, if on, when the audible warning is activated.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
3
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the Rear Park Sense System. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
or blind spots before backing up. You are respon-
sible for the safety of your surroundings and must
continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure
to do so can result in serious injury or death.
• Before using the Rear Park Sense System, it is
strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch
ball assembly be disconnected from the vehicle
when the vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do
so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or
obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer
to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the warning
display turns the red LEDs ON. Also, the sensors
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly,
depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
•
To avoid vehicle damage the Rear Park Sense
System should only be used as a parking aid and
is unable to recognize every obstacle, including
small objects. Parking curbs might be temporarily
detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located
above or below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity to the rear of the
vehicle.
•
To avoid vehicle damage the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using the Rear Park Sense
System to be able to stop in time when an obstacle
is detected. It is recommended that the driver look
over his/her shoulder when using the Rear Park
Sense System.
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•
Ensure that the rear bumper is free of dirt and debris
to keep the system operating properly.
•
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of the system.
If “Service Park Sense System” appears in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) after making sure the
rear bumper is clean please see your authorized dealer.
Enable/Disable the Rear Park Assist System — If
Equipped
The Rear Park Assist System can be enabled and disabled
with a switch located on the switch bank of the instru-
ment panel. When the switch is pressed to disable the
system, the instrument cluster will display the 9PARK
ASSIST DISABLED9 message. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual.
When the shift lever is changed to R (Reverse) and the
system is disabled, the instrument cluster will actuate a
single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will display
the message.
The Rear Park Assist Switch LED will be ON when the
Rear Park Assist System is disabled or defective. The
Rear Park Assist Switch LED will be OFF when the
system is enabled.
The system can be turned on or off through the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), if equipped. For
details, refer to “Personal Settings (Customer Program-
mable Features)” under “Electronic Vehicle Information
enter (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual.
Service the Rear Park Assist System
When the Rear Park Assist System is defective, the
instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per
ignition cycle, and it will display the (SERVICE PARK
ASSIST SYSTEM( message. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
3
If (SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM( appears in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) after mak-
ing sure the rear bumper is clean please see your autho-
rized dealer.
Cleaning the Rear Park Assist System
Clean the Rear Park Assist Sensors with water, car wash
soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do
not scratch or poke the sensors, otherwise, you could
damage the sensors.
REAR CAMERA — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Rear Camera
system that allows you to see an on-screen image (located
in the center of the instrument cluster) of the rear of your
vehicle whenever it is put into R (Reverse). The camera is
located in the light bar over the rear license plate.
NOTE: Refer to “Setting Display Properties” under
“System Settings” in the Navigation User’s Manual for
instructions regarding navigation screen brightness ad-
justments.
Use the following steps to access the Rear Backup Cam-
era feature:
1. Start the engine.
2. Place shift lever in R (Reverse).
3. Wait one to two seconds, and the camera view will
display on the instrument cluster.
NOTE: The camera view will display only while the
vehicle is in R (Reverse).
4. Perform a visual check of the rear area.
NOTE: CHECK ENTIRE SURROUNDINGS before
backing up.
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
5. Backup as necessary.
6. Place the sift lever in P (Park) or D (Drive) to exit the
Rear Backup Camera system.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the Rear Camera System. Always check care-
fully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or
blind spots before backing up. You are responsible
for the safety of your surroundings and must con-
tinue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do
so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
•
To avoid vehicle damage the Rear Camera System
should only be used as a parking aid and is unable
to view every obstacle, or object in your drive
path.
•
To avoid vehicle damage the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using the Rear Camera Sys-
tem to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is
seen. It is recommended that the driver look fre-
quently over his/her shoulder when using the Rear
Camera System.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or anything else builds up on
the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry
with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
3
OVERHEAD CONSOLE — IF EQUIPPED
The overhead console can contain courtesy/reading
lights, an optional universal garage door opener
(HomeLinkt), storage for sunglasses, optional power
sunroof switches and an optional power liftgate switch.
Courtesy/Reading Lights
At the forward end of the console are two courtesy/
reading lights.
Press the lens to turn these lights on. Press a second time
to turn the lights off.
The lights also turn on when a front door, a rear door or
the liftgate is opened. The lights will also turn on when
the unlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter
is pressed.
Sunglasses Storage
At the rear of the overhead console, a compartment is
provided for the storage of a pair of sunglasses.
Press the door latch to open the compartment. The door
will slowly rotate to an open position.
Overhead Console
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof buttons are located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
Press and hold the “OPEN” button rearward to fully
open the sunroof. The sunroof can be stopped at any
position between closed and full open. Momentarily
pressing the “OPEN” button rearward will activate the
Express Open Feature, causing the sunroof to open
automatically.
Press and hold the “VENT” button to open the vent. The
sunroof can be stopped at any position between closed
and full vent. To close the sunroof from the vent position,
press and hold the “CLOSE” button forward. Releasing
the button will stop the movement of the sunroof and the
sunroof will remain in the partial vent position until the
button is pushed forward again.
NOTE: The power sunroof buttons remain active for up
to 45 seconds after the ignition button has been turned
off. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
Power Sunroof buttons
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
3
Express Open Feature
The sunroof is equipped with an intermediate stop or
comfort stop position. This feature is designed to elimi-
nate wind buffeting at vehicle speeds between 20-40 mph
(32-64 km/h). To operate this feature, momentarily press
the “OPEN” button rearward to activate the Express
Open Feature and the glass will automatically stop at the
comfort stop position. Pressing the button rearward
again will fully open the sunroof.
During the Express Open operation, any movement of
the button will stop the sunroof and it will remain in a
partial open position. Again, momentarily pressing the
button rearward will activate the Express Open Feature.
To close the sunroof, press and hold the “CLOSE” button
forward. Again, any release of the button will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partial open
condition until the button is pushed forward again.
The sunshade can be opened manually. It will also open
as the sunroof opens. The sunshade cannot be closed if
the sunroof is open.
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• NEVER
leave children alone in a vehicle. Occu-
pants, particularly unattended children, can be-
come entrapped by the power sunroof while oper-
ating the power sunroof switch. Such entrapment
may result in serious injury or death. Don’t leave
the keys in the ignition. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the ve-
hicle
• In an accident, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are properly secured too.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow fingers or other body parts, or any
object to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Sunroof Comfort Position — If Equipped
If equipped, some model sunroofs will stop at a prede-
termined comfort position — not allowing the sunroof to
open to the full retracted glass position. The comfort
position stops the sunroof glass at approximately 3/4
open position. This will allow for minimal wind buffet-
ing.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
3
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
There are two 12 volt power outlets located on the
instrument panel below the radio. The driver’s side outlet
is controlled by the ignition switch and the passenger
side outlet is connected directly to the battery. The
driver’s side outlet will also operate a conventional cigar
lighter unit (if equipped with an optional Smoker’s
Package).
A third outlet is located on the back of the front center
console near the floor, and is also controlled by the
ignition switch.
A fourth outlet is located on the driver’s side, in the rear
cargo area and is also controlled by the ignition switch.
Front Power Outlets
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The outlets include tethered caps labeled with a key or
battery symbol indicating the power source. The passen-
ger side instrument panel and center console outlets are
powered directly from the battery, items plugged into
these outlets may discharge the battery and/or prevent
engine starting.
The passenger side and center console outlets are pro-
tected by an automatic reset circuit breaker. The auto-
matic circuit breaker restores power when the overload is
removed.
NOTE: If desired, the fourth power outlet in the rear
cargo area can be converted by your authorized dealer to
provide power with the ignition switch in the OFF
position.
Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power
from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e.
cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge suffi-
ciently to degrade battery life and/or prevent engine
starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e. coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the battery
even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and
with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or long
periods of the vehicle not being started (with accesso-
ries still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a
sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to
recharge the vehicle’s battery.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug. Improper use of the power outlet can
cause damage.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
3
CUPHOLDERS
Front Seat Cupholders
The cupholders are located in the forward edge of the
center console. Push down on the forward edge of the
console to release the cupholders. Press the cover up
when the cupholders are no longer needed.
Second Row Seat Cupholders
On vehicles equipped with five passenger seating the
second row seat cupholders are located in middle of the
seatback armrest. Pull down on the armrest to access the
cupholders. Push the armrest up when the cupholders
are no longer needed.
Six Passenger Seating Cupholders
Five Passenger Seating Cupholders
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
On vehicles equipped with six passenger seating the
second row seat cupholders are located in the forward
edge of the center console located between the second
row seats. Push down on the forward edge of the console
to release the cupholders. Press the cover up when the
cupholders are no longer needed.
Third Row Seat Cupholders — If Equipped
There are cupholders located in each rear trim panel for
the third row seat passengers.
STORAGE
Console Features
The center consoles may be equipped with a tissue
holder mounted on the underside of the cover. The
bottom of the console bins may also have built in holders
for compact discs or cassette tapes.
Rear Cargo Storage Bin — If Equipped
The storage bin is located in the floor of the rear cargo
area. To open lift up on the handle.
Rear Storage Bin
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
3
Retractable Cargo Area Cover — If Equipped
To cover the cargo area:
1. Fold down the third row seatbacks.
2. Unfold the cargo cover extensions and lock into place.
3. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the slots
located on the trim panel behind the second row seat-
backs.
4. Grasp the center portion of the cover flap. Pull it over
the cargo area.
5. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover flap into the
slots on the rear trim panel.
6. The liftgate may be opened or closed with the cargo
cover in place.
WARNING!
In an accident a cargo cover loose in the vehicle could
cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden stop and
strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store the cargo
cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compart-
ment. Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken
from its mounting. Do not store in the vehicle.
Stowed Position
1. Fold down the third row seatbacks.
2. Fold the cargo cover extensions to their stowed posi-
tion and lock into place.
3. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the slots
located on the trim panel behind the third row seatbacks.
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Grasp the center portion of the cover flap. Pull it over
the cargo area.
5. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover flap into the
slots on the rear trim panel.
6. The liftgate may be opened or closed with the cargo
cover in place.
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks
The tie-downs located on cargo area floor and on the rear
trim panels should be used to safely secure loads when
vehicle is moving.
WARNING!
•
Cargo tie-down hooks are not safe anchors for a
child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or collision
a hook could pull loose and allow the child seat to
come loose. A child could be badly injured. Use
only the anchors provided for child seat tethers.
•
The weight and position of cargo and passengers
can change the vehicle center of gravity and ve-
hicle handling. To avoid loss of control resulting
in personal injury, follow these guidelines for
loading your vehicle:
•
Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
3
•
Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the
vehicle to sway.
•
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the
seatback. This could impair visibility or become a
dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
WARNING!
To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and
use seat belts.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry the
weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The
load must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be
uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.
Roof Rack
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars.
The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo
inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not
exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
To move the cross bars, press the upper edge of each
cross bar button, then move the cross bar to the desired
position, keeping the crossbars parallel to the rack frame.
This is can be done with one person standing on each
side of the vehicle, moving the cross bar at the same time.
Once the cross bar is in place, press the lower edge of the
cross bar button to lock it into position.
Attempt to move the crossbar again to ensure that it has
properly locked into position.
NOTE: To reduce the amount of wind noise when the
cross bars are not in use, move both cross bars next to
each other towards the rear of the vehicle in the rear most
position.
The tie down holes on the cross bar ends should always
be used to tie down the load. Check the straps frequently
to be sure that the load remains securely attached.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
3
CAUTION!
• Crossbars should remain equally spaced or parallel
at any luggage rack position for proper function.
Noncompliance could result in damage to the lug-
gage rack, cargo and/or vehicle.
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not
exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of 150
lbs (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as evenly
as possible and secure the load appropriately.
• Long loads which extend over the windshield, such
as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with large
frontal area should be secured to both the front and
rear of the vehicle.
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack.
Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby truck
traffic, can add sudden upward lift to loads. This is
especially true on large flat loads and may result in
damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your ve-
hicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle,
particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal in-
jury or property damage. Follow the Roof Rack Cau-
tions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM
The automatic load leveling system will provide a level
riding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading
conditions.
A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers
raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height. It takes
approximately 1 mile (1.6 km) of driving for the leveling
to complete depending on road surface conditions.
If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately 15
hours, the leveling system will bleed itself down. The
vehicle must be driven to reset the system.
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
m Instrument Panel And Controls .............184
m Base Instrument Cluster ..................185
m Premium Instrument Cluster ...............186
m Instrument Cluster Descriptions ............187
m Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) —
If Equipped ...........................199
▫ Oil Change Required ...................202
▫ Customer Programmable Features —
If Equipped .........................203
▫ Compass Display — If Equipped ..........207
▫ Mini-Trip Functions — If Equipped ........208
m Setting The Analog Clock .................209
m Electronic Digital Clock ..................209
▫ Clock Setting Procedure.................210
m Radio General Information ................210
▫ Radio Broadcast Signals .................210
▫ Two Types Of Signals ..................211
▫ Electrical Disturbances ..................211
▫ AM Reception .......................211
4
▫ FM Reception ........................211
m Sales Code RAH — AM & FM Stereo Radio With
CD Player And CD/DVD Changer Controls ....212
▫ Radio Operation ......................212
▫ CD Player Operation ...................216
▫ CD/DVD Changer Operation .............218
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files .............218
▫ Operation Instructions - (CD Mode For MP3
Audio Play) .........................220
m Sales Code REV — AM & FM Stereo Radio With
CD Player And CD/DVD Changer Controls ....222
▫ Radio Operation ......................222
▫ CD Player Operation ...................226
▫ CD/DVD Changer Operation .............228
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files .............228
▫ Operation Instructions - (CD Mode For MP3
Audio Play) .........................230
▫ Operating Instructions — MP3 Player, Portable
Walkman ...........................231
▫ Operating Instructions — Video
Games/Camcorders ...................231
m 6 Disc CD/DVD Changer (RDV) — If Equipped .232
▫ Operating Instructions — CD/DVD Changer . .233
▫ Eject (EJT) Button .....................235
▫ Operating Instructions — Remote Control ....235
▫ Operating Instructions — Video Screen ......239
▫ Operating Instructions — Headphones ......241
▫ Operating Instructions — Auxiliary Input ....243
182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
m Navigation System — If Equipped ...........244
m Satellite Radio — If Equipped ..............245
▫ ystem Activation ......................245
▫ Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ENS/SID) ....................245
▫ Selecting Satellite Mode In RBB, RAH, REV
And RBK Radios ......................246
▫ Selecting Satellite Mode In RBP, RBU, RAZ,
RB1 And RBQ Radios ..................246
▫ Selecting a Channel ....................247
▫ Storing And Selecting Pre-Set Channels ......247
▫ Using The PTY (Program Type) Button
(If Equipped) ........................247
▫ PTY Button 9Scan9 .....................247
▫ PTY Button 9Seek9 .....................248
▫ Satellite Antenna ......................248
▫ Reception Quality .....................248
m Remote Sound System Controls .............249
▫ Radio Operation ......................249
▫ CD Player ..........................249
m CD/DVD Disc Maintenance ...............250
m Radio Operation And Cellular Phones ........250
m Climate Controls .......................250
▫ Manual Air Conditioning And Heating
System .............................251
▫ Mode Control ........................252
▫ Manual Air Conditioning Operation ........256
▫ Dual-Zone Automatic Temperature Control . . .259
▫ Electric Rear Window Defroster ...........269
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183
4
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
BASE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185
4
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Voltage Light
This light monitors the electrical system voltage.
The light should turn on momentarily as the
engine is started. If the light stays on or turns on while
driving, it indicates a problem with the charging system.
Immediate service should be obtained.
2. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-
ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads
“H”, pull over in a safe area as soon as possible and
stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air condi-
tioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the
normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H”, and
you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off
immediately, and call for service.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187
4
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, see Section 7 of this manual. Follow
the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap
paragraph.
3. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
The Low Fuel Light will turn on when the fuel level
reaches approximately 2 to 4 gallons (7 to 15 liters)
this light will remain on until fuel is added.
4. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal
when the turn signal lever is operated.
If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has
traveled about one mile with the turn signals on, a chime
will sound to alert you to turn the signals off. If either
indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check for a defective
outside light bulb.
5. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
6. Anti-Lock Brake Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake Sys-
tem. The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
Ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the
light inspected by an authorized dealer.
7. Brake System Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on, it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, there
is a low brake fluid level or there is a problem with the
anti-lock brake system.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. Failure of either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi-
tions. The vehicle should have service performed.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
sary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger-
ous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will
take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have an
accident. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189
4
Vehicles equipped with Anti-Lock brakes (ABS), are also
equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD).
In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light
will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair
to the ABS system is required.
The operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked
by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to
the ON position. The light should illuminate for approxi-
mately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected.
If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected
by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
8. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator
Light/Traction Control System (TCS) Indicator Light
If this indicator light flashes during accelera-
tion, apply as little throttle as possible. While
driving, ease up on the accelerator. Adapt your
speed and driving to the prevailing road con-
ditions, and do not switch off the ESP, or TCS.
NOTE: Extended heavy use of Traction Control may
cause the system to deactivate and turn on the Traction
Control Light. This is to prevent overheating of the brake
system and is a normal condition. The system will remain
disabled for about 4 minutes until the brakes have
cooled. The system will automatically reactivate and turn
off the Traction Control Light.
190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
9. Tachometer
The red segments indicate the maximum permissible
engine revolutions-per-minute (rpm. x 1000) for each
gear range. Before reaching the red area, ease up on the
accelerator.
10. Trip Odometer Button
Press this button to change the display from odometer to
either of the two trip odometer settings. The word TRIP
and either “A” or “B” will appear when in the trip
odometer mode. Push in and hold the button for two
seconds to reset the trip odometer to 0 miles or kilome-
ters. The odometer must be in trip mode to reset.
11. Transmission Range Indicator
This display indicator shows the automatic transmission
gear selection.
12. AutoStick Light
This display indicator illuminates when the gearshift
lever is moved to the AutoStick position.
13. Odometer/Trip Odometer
The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has
been driven. U.S. federal regulations require that upon
transfer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the
purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been
driven. Therefore, if the odometer reading is changed
during repair or replacement, be sure to keep a record of
the reading before and after the service so that the correct
mileage can be determined.
The two trip odometers show individual trip mileage. To
switch from odometer to trip odometers, press and
release the Trip Odometer button. To reset a trip odom-
eter, display the desired trip odometer to be reset then
push and hold the button until the display resets (ap-
proximately 2 seconds).
Vehicle Warning Messages
When the appropriate conditions exist, vehicle warning
messages will display in the odometer.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191
4
NOTE: If the instrument cluster is equipped with the
optional Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC),
then all warnings will only display in the EVIC. (Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in this
section for specific messages).
gASCAP
If the vehicle diagnostic system detects a leak or change
in the evaporative system, or the fuel filler cap is loose,
improperly installed, or damaged, the words “gASCAP”
will display in the odometer. If this occurs, tighten the
fuel filler cap properly and press the odometer reset
button to turn off the “gASCAP” message. (Refer to
“Onboard Diagnostic System — OBDII” in Section 7 of
this manual for more information). If the problem con-
tinues, the message will appear the next time the vehicle
is started. See your authorized dealer service center as
soon as possible.
Change Oil
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Change Oil” message will flash in
the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12
seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the
next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position.
To turn off the message temporarily, press and release the
Trip Odometer button on the instrument cluster. To reset
the oil change indicator system (after performing the
scheduled maintenance) perform the following proce-
dure:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position (Do
not start the engine).
192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three
times within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary repeat this procedure.
14. Cruise Indicator
This indicator shows that the Speed Control
System is ON.
15. Malfunction Indicator Light
This light is part of an onboard diagnostic system
called OBD that monitors engine and automatic
transmission control systems. The light will illu-
minate when the key is in the ON position before engine
start. If the bulb does not come on when turning the key
from OFF to ON, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc. may illuminate the light after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.
The Malfunction Indicator Light flashes to alert you to
serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of
power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle
should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs.
16. High Beam Light
This light shows that the headlights are on high
beam. Pull the Multi-Function lever towards the
steering wheel to switch the headlights from high or low
beam.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193
4
17. Navigation Screen/Rear View Camera — If
Equipped
The navigation system provides maps, turn identifica-
tion, selection menus and instructions for selecting a
variety of destinations and routes. Refer to your “Navi-
gation User’s Manual” for detailed operating instruc-
tions.
The Rear View Camera system uses the Navigator Screen
to display the area behind the vehicle. Camera view will
display only while the vehicle is in R (Reverse).
18. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This light shows the front fog lights are ON.
19. Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light shows low engine oil pressure. The light
should turn on momentarily when the engine is
started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
continuous chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
20. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned ON, this
light will turn on for 5 to 8 seconds as a bulb check.
During the bulb check, if the driver’s seat belt is
unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulb check or
when driving, if the driver seat belt remains unbuckled,
the Seat Belt Warning Light will flash or remain on
continuously. Refer to 9Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Re-
minder System (BeltAlert™)9 in the Occupant Restraints
section for more information.
194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
21. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires are significantly under-inflated. Ac-
cordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates,
you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible,
and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to over-
heat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
NOTE: Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsi-
bility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underin-
flation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195
4
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replace-
ment or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.
NOTE: Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale
after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your
vehicle, to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires
and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels (the spare is not moni-
tored or equipped with a sensor). TPMS pressures
and warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tion or sensor damage may result when using re-
placement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants
or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
For additional information on TPMS, refer to Section 5 —
Starting and Operating, “Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-
tem” of this manual.
196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
For additional information on Tire Pressures, refer to
Section 5 — Starting and Operating, “Tire Inflation
Pressures” of this manual.
22. Airbag Light
This light turns on and remains on for 6 to 8
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition
switch is first turned ON. If the light is not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
23. Electronic Vehicle Information Center Display — If
Equipped
When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
messages.
24. Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condi-
tion. If this light is accompanied by a continuous
chime, the engine temperature is critically hot, and the
vehicle should be turned off immediately. The vehicle
should be serviced as soon as possible.
25. Liftgate Ajar — If Equipped
This light turns on if the liftgate is not com-
pletely closed.
26. Door Ajar Light — If Equipped
This light turns on if a door is not completely
closed.
27. Washer Fluid Light — If Equipped
This light turns on when the washer fluid level
falls below approximately 1/4 filled. The light will
remain on until fluid is added.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197
4
28. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Warning
Light/Brake Assist System (BAS) Warning Light — If
Equipped
The malfunction lamp for the ESP is combined
with BAS. The yellow “ESP/BAS Warning
Lamp” comes on when the ignition switch is
turned to the “ON” position. They should go
out with the engine running. If the “ESP/BAS Warning
Lamp” comes on continuously with the engine running,
a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the
BAS system. If this light remains on after several ignition
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible.
29. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC.) Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control system. If a prob-
lem is detected the light will come on while the
engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when
the vehicle has completely stopped and the gear selector
is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off.
If the light remains lit with the engine running your
vehicle will usually be drivable, however, see your dealer
for service as soon as possible. If the light is flashing
when the engine is running, immediate service is re-
quired and you may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may
require towing. The light will come on when the ignition
is first turned on and remain on briefly as a bulb check.
If the light does not come on during starting, have the
system checked by an authorized dealer.
30. All-Wheel-Drive Failure Indicator Light — If AWD
equipped
This light monitors the All-Wheel-Drive
(AWD) system. The light will come on, for a
bulb check, when the ignition key is turned to
the ON position and may stay on for as long as
3 seconds.
198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When lit solid: There is an AWD system fault. AWD
performance will be at a reduced level. Service the AWD
system soon.
When blinking: The AWD system is temporarily dis-
abled due to overload condition.
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) con-
sists of the following:
•
Vehicle information warning message displays
•
Tire Pressure Monitor System — If Equipped
•
Customer programmable features
•
Compass display
•
Mini-Trip functions
Pressing the MENU button will change the displayed
programming features. Pressing the STEP button will
display the available choices. Pressing the MENU button
a second time accepts a selected choice.
When the appropriate conditions exist, the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays the following
messages.
•
LEFT/RIGHT TURN SIGNAL ON (with a continuous
warning chime)
•
INVALID KEY & FOB (with a single chime)
•
PARK ASSIST DISABLED
•
SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM
•
SERVICE IMMOBILIZER (with a single chime)
•
KEY FOB BATTERY LOW (with a single chime)
•
KEY & FOB PROGRAMMED (with a single chime)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199
4
•
PROGRAM KEY & FOB
•
MEMORY #1/#2 POSITION SET (with a single chime)
•
MEMORY #1/#2 POS SELECTED
•
MEMORY SYSTEM DISABLED VEHICLE NOT IN
PARK (with a single chime)
•
SET INHIBITED DUE TO MOTION (with a single
chime)
•
FOB LINKED (with a single chime)
•
FOB UNLINKED (with a single chime)
•
PARK BRAKE ENGAGED (with a single chime)
•
LOW BRAKE FLUID (with a single chime)
•
LOW FUEL (with a single chime)
•
MENU IN PARK ONLY
•
LIST # ALERT MESSAGES
•
UNLOCK TO OPEN LIFTGATE (with a single chime)
•
PUT IN PARK FOR LIFTGATE (with a single chime)
•
TOO COLD FOR PWR LIFTGATE (with a single
chime)
•
TOO HOT FOR PWR LIFTGATE (with a single chime)
•
PERFORM SERVICE (with a single chime)
•
LEFT/RIGHT FRONT DOOR AJAR (one or more,
with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph)
•
LEFT/RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR (one or more, with
a single chime if speed is above 1 mph)
•
DOOR(S) AJAR (with a single chime)
•
DOOR(S) AND GATE AJAR (with a single chime)
•
LIFT GATE AJAR (with a single chime if speed is
above 1 mph)
200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
WASHER FLUID LOW (with a single chime)
•
PEDAL ADJUST DISABLED CRUISE ENGAGED
•
PEDAL ADJUST DISABLED VEHICLE IN REVERSE
•
CHANNEL 1, 2, OR 3 TRANSMIT (with a single
chime)
•
CHANNEL 1, 2, OR 3 TRAINING (with a single
chime)
•
CHANNEL 1, 2, OR 3 TRAINED (with a single chime)
•
CLEARING CHANNELS
•
CHANNELS CLEARED
•
CHANNELS DEFAULTED
•
DID NOT TRAIN
•
1,2,3 OR 4 TIRE(S) LOW PRESSURE (Refer to ”Tire
Pressure Monitor System” in the “Starting And Oper-
ating, Tire Section”)
•
SERVICE TIRE SYSTEM SOON (Refer to ”Tire Pres-
sure Monitor System” in the “Starting And Operating,
Tire Section”)
•
TCS SUSPENDED (Traction Control System, with a
graphic and single chime)
•
TCS ACTIVE (Traction Control System, with a
graphic)
•
SERVICE TCS SYSTEM (Traction Control System, with
a graphic and single chime)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201
4
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10
seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the
next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
release the Menu button. To reset the oil change indicator
system (after performing the scheduled maintenance)
perform the following procedure:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position (Do not
start the engine).
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary repeat this procedure.
NOTE:
•
The oil change indicator system will not monitor the
time since the last oil change. Change the engine oil if
it has been 6 months since your last oil change even if
the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated.
•
Change the engine oil more often if you drive your
vehicle off-road for an extended period.
•
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or 6 months, whichever
comes first.
202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Customer Programmable Features — If Equipped
Press the MENU button until one of the following
display choices appears:
Language?
When in this display you may select one of three lan-
guages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
computer functions and navigation system. Press the
STEP button while in this display selects English,
Francais, or Espanol. As you continue the displayed
information will be shown in the selected language.
Park Assist System? ON/OFF
When this feature is selected the system scans for objects
behind the vehicle using four sensors located in the rear
bumper. Objects can be detected from up to 59 inches
(150 cm). Pressing the “STEP” button while in this
display will disable/enable the Rear Park Assist System.
The EVIC will display the following message: PARK
ASSIST DISABLED after the feature has been disabled
and SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM if there is a prob-
lem with the system.
Service Interval
When this feature is selected a service interval between
2,000 miles (3 200 km) and 6, 000 miles (10 000 km) in 500
mile (800 km) increments may be selected. Pressing the
STEP button when in this display will select distances
between 2,000 miles (3 200 km) and 6, 000 miles (10 000
km) in 500 mile (800 km) increments.
Reset Service Distance (Displays Only if Service
Interval was Changed)
When this feature is selected the current accumulated
service distance can be reset to the newly selected service
interval. Pressing the STEP button when in this display
will select “Yes” or “No.”
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203
4
Use factory Settings?
When in this display you may select to use the factory
settings and no programmable features will be offered.
Tilt Mirrors in Reverse? (Available with Memory
Seat Only)
When this feature is selected the outside mirrors will
move slightly downward from the present position when
the vehicle is shifted into the Reverse position. The
outside mirrors will then return to the original position
when the vehicle is shifted out of Reverse position.
Pressing the STEP button when in this display will select
9Yes9 or 9No9.
Auto Door Locks?
When this feature is selected, all doors and the liftgate
lock automatically when the speed of the vehicle reaches
15 mph (25 km/h). Pressing the STEP button when in this
display will select “Yes” or “No.”
Auto Unlock On Exit?
When this feature is selected all the vehicle’s doors will
unlock when the driver’s door is opened if the vehicle is
stopped and the transmission is in P (Park) or N (Neu-
tral) position. Pressing the STEP button when in this
display will select “Yes” or “No.”
Remote Unlock Driver’s Door 1st?
When this feature is selected only the driver’s door will
unlock on the first press of the remote keyless entry
unlock button and require a second press to unlock the
remaining locked doors and liftgate. When REMOTE
UNLOCK ALL DOORS is selected all of the doors and
the liftgate will unlock at the first press of the remote
keyless entry unlock button. Pressing the STEP button
when in this display will select DRIVER’S DOOR 1ST or
ALL DOORS.
204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Remote Linked To Memory? (Available with
Memory Seat Only)
When this feature is selected the memory seat, mirror,
and radio settings will return to the memory set position
when the remote keyless entry “Unlock” button is
pressed. If this feature is not selected then the memory
seat, mirror, and radio settings can only return to the
memory set position using the door mounted switch.
Pressing the STEP button when in this display will select
“Yes” or “No.”
Sound Horn On Lock?
When this feature is selected a short horn sound will
occur when the remote keyless entry “Lock” button is
pressed. This feature may be selected with or without the
flash lights on lock/unlock feature. Pressing the STEP
button when in this display will select “Yes” or “No.”
Flash Lights On Lock/Unlock?
When this feature is selected, the front and rear turn
signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked
using the remote keyless entry transmitter. This feature
may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock
feature selected. Pressing the STEP button when in this
display will select “Yes” or “No.”
Headlamp Delay
When this feature is selected the driver can choose, when
exiting the vehicle, to have the headlamps remain on for
30, 60, or 90 seconds, or not remain on. Pressing the STEP
button when in this display will select 30, 60, 90, or OFF.
Headlamp On With Wipers? (Available with Auto
Headlights Only)
When this feature is selected and the headlight switch
has at least once been moved to the AUTO position, the
headlights will turn on in approximately 10 seconds
when the wipers are turned on. The headlights will also
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205
4
turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were
turned on in this way. Pressing the STEP button when in
this display will select “Yes” or “No.”
NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime
causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the
brightness, refer to “Lights” in this section.
Power Accessory Delay?
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, hands–free system, DVD video system,
power sunroof, and power outlets will remain active for
up to 45 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned
off. Opening a vehicle door or liftgate will cancel this
feature.
Easy Exit Seat? (Available with Memory Seat Only)
This feature provides automatic driver’s seat positioning
which will enhance driver mobility out of and into the
vehicle.
The Easy Entry Easy Exit feature is not enabled when the
vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy Entry Easy
Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through the
programmable features in the Electronic Vehicle Informa-
tion Center (EVIC). Pressing the STEP button when in
this display will select “Yes” or “No.” The seat will return
to the memorized seat location (if REMOTE LINK TO
MEMORY is set to YES) when the remote keyless entry
transmitter is used to unlock the door. For more informa-
tion refer to “Easy Entry/Exit Seat in the Driver Memory
Seat section.
Display U.S. or Metric?
Pressing the US/M button will change the EVIC, odom-
eter, navigation system and A/C Control units from US
to Metric.
206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Compass Display — If Equipped
This display provides one of eight compass readings to
indicate the direction the vehicle is facing.
Automatic Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating which eliminates the
need to manually calibrate the compass. When the ve-
hicle is new, the compass may appear erratic and the
EVIC will display “COMPASS CALIBRATING” until the
compass is calibrated. The compass will function nor-
mally.
To calibrate the compass, drive the vehicle in one or more
complete 360° circles, under 5 mph (8 km/h) in an area
free from large metal objects, until the “COMPASS CALI-
BRATING” message turns off.
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic, inaccurate or abnormal,
you may wish to manually calibrate the compass. Prior to
calibration, make sure the proper zone is selected.
To put into a Calibration Mode: Turn on the ignition
switch and set the display to Compass. Press the RESET
button for at least 10 seconds until the “COMPASS
CALIBRATING” message appears. Release the MENU
button and drive the vehicle in one or more complete
three, 360° circles, under 5 mph (8 km/h) in an area free
from large metal objects, until the “COMPASS CALI-
BRATING” message turns off.
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic
North and Geographic North. In some areas of the
country, the difference between magnetic and geographic
North is great enough to cause the compass to give false
readings. In order to ensure accuracy, the compass vari-
ance should be properly set according to the compass
variance zone that the vehicle is in.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207
4
NOTE: Magnetic materials should be kept away from
the overhead console.
To set the variance: Turn the ignition switch ON and set
the display to Compass. Press the MENU button for
approximately 5 seconds but no more than 10 seconds.
The “COMPASS VARIANCE” message and the last vari-
ance zone number will be displayed. Press the STEP
button to select the proper variance zone as shown in the
map. Press the RESET button to set the new variance
zone and resume normal operation.
Mini-Trip Functions — If Equipped
This displays information on the following:
•
Average Fuel Economy (ECO AVG)
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset. The
minimum average fuel economy that will be displayed
on reset is 0.3 mpg.
•
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be travelled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined using the MPG for the last few minutes.
208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
Off Mode
Shows a blank display.
•
Step Button
Push this button to cycle through all the Mini-trip
functions.
To Reset The Display
Pressing and releasing the Reset button once will clear
the resettable function currently being displayed. The
resettable function is average fuel economy. Reset will
only occur if the resettable function is currently being
displayed.
SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK
To set the analog clock, at the
top center of the instrument
panel, press and hold the but-
ton until the setting is correct.
The clock will adjust slowly at
first and then quicker the
longer the button is held.
ELECTRONIC DIGITAL CLOCK
The clock and radio each use the display panel built into
the radio. A digital readout shows the time in hours and
minutes.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209
4
On vehicles equipped with an Analog Clock the radio
time display will function as follows:
•
Radio On — Radio clock will display for approxi-
mately 5 seconds after button is pressed, then default
back to radio frequency.
•
Radio Off — Radio clock will display for approxi-
mately 5 seconds after button is pressed, then default
back to blank screen.
The following radio time options can be changed by your
dealer service department:
•
Radio On — Radio clock will continue to be displayed
after button is pressed.
•
Radio Off — Radio clock will displayed continuously.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON or ACC position
and press the time button. Using the tip of a ballpoint pen
or similar object, press either the hour (H) or minute (M)
buttons on the radio.
2. Press the H button to set hours or the M button to set
minutes. The time setting will increase each time you
press a button.
RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION
Radio Broadcast Signals
Your new radio will provide excellent reception under
most operating conditions. Like any system, however, car
radios have performance limitations, due to mobile op-
eration and natural phenomena, which might lead you to
believe your sound system is malfunctioning. To help
210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
you understand and save you concern about these “ap-
parent” malfunctions, you must understand a point or
two about the transmission and reception of radio sig-
nals.
Two Types of Signals
There are two basic types of radio signals... AM or
Amplitude Modulation, in which the transmitted sound
causes the amplitude, or height, of the radio waves to
vary... and FM or Frequency Modulation, in which the
frequency of the wave is varied to carry the sound.
Electrical Disturbances
Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during
transmission. They mainly affect the wave amplitude,
and thus remain a part of the AM reception. They
interfere very little with the frequency variations that
carry the FM signal.
AM Reception
AM sound is based on wave amplitude, so AM reception
can be disrupted by such things as lightning, power lines
and neon signs.
FM Reception
Because FM transmission is based on frequency varia-
tions, interference that consists of amplitude variations
can be filtered out, leaving the reception relatively clear,
which is the major feature of FM radio.
NOTE: The radio, steering wheel radio controls (if
equipped), and 6 disc CD/DVD changer (if equipped)
will remain active for up to 90 seconds after the ignition
switch has been turned off, depending upon the acces-
sory delay setting. Opening a vehicle front door will
cancel this feature.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211
4
SALES CODE RAH — AM & FM STEREO RADIO
WITH CD PLAYER AND CD/DVD CHANGER
CONTROLS
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower left
side of your radio faceplate.
Radio Operation
Power/Volume Control
Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio on. Turn the
volume control clockwise to increase the volume.
NOTE: Power to operate the radio is supplied through
the ignition switch. It must be in the ON or ACC position
to operate the radio.
PTY (Program Type)
Pressing the INFO button once while in FM mode will
turn on the PTY mode for 5 seconds. If no action is taken
during the 5 second time out, the PTY icon will turn off.
Pressing the TUNE button within 5 seconds will allow
the program format type to be selected. Many radio
stations do not currently broadcast PTY information.
RAH radio
212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Toggle the TUNE button to select the following format types:
Program Type Radio Display
Adult Hits Adult Hit
Classical Classical
Classic Rock Classic Rock
College College
Country Country
Information Inform
Jazz Jazz
Foreign Language Language
News News
Nostalgia Nostalgia
Oldies Oldies
Personality Personality
Public Public
Rhythm and Blues R & B
Religious Music Religious Music
Program Type Radio Display
Religious Talk Religious Talk
Rock Rock
Soft Soft
Soft Rock Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R&B
Sports Sports
Talk Talk
Top 40 Top 40
Weather Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected PTY name. The PTY
function only operates when in the FM and Satellite (if
equipped) modes.
The radio display will flash “SEEK” and the selected PTY
program type when searching for the next PTY station. If
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213
4
no station is found with the selected PTY program type,
the radio will return to the last preset station.
If a preset button is activated while in the PTY (Program
Type) mode, the PTY mode will be exited and the radio
will tune to the preset station.
Mode
Press the MODE button to select between, AM, FM, CD,
CD/DVD changer or the Satellite Radio (if equipped).
When the Satellite Radio (if equipped) is selected “SA”
will appear in your radio display.
A disc may remain in the radio while in the Satellite or
radio mode.
Seek
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
station in either the AM, FM or Satellite mode. Press the
top of the button to seek up and the bottom to seek down.
The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you
make another selection. Holding the button in will by-
pass stations without stopping until you release it.
Tuning
Press the TUNE control up or down to increase or
decrease the frequency. If you press and hold the button,
the radio will continue to tune until you release the
button. The frequency will be displayed and continu-
ously updated while the button is pressed.
Balance
The Balance control adjusts the left-to-right speaker bal-
ance. Press the AUDIO button, select BALANCE, then
press SEEK + or SEEK 2 to adjust the balance.
Fade
The Fade control provides for balance between the front
and rear speakers. Press the AUDIO button, select FADE,
then press SEEK + or SEEK 2 to adjust the fade balance.
214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Tone Control
The Bass and/or Treble controls sound for the desired
tone. Press the AUDIO button, select Bass or TREBLE,
then press SEEK + or SEEK 2 to increase or decrease
amplification of the band.
To Set The Radio Push-Button Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to push-button memory, press the SET button.
SET 1 will show in the display window. Select the
push-button you wish to lock onto this station and press
and release that button. If a station is not selected within
5 seconds after pressing the SET button, the station will
continue to play but will not be locked into push-button
memory.
You may add a second station to each push-button by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 10 AM and 10 FM
stations to be locked into memory. You can recall the
stations stored in SET 2 memory by pressing the push-
button twice.
To Change From Clock To Radio Mode
Press the TIME button to change the display between
radio frequency and time.
General Information
This radio complies with Part 15 of FCC rules and with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference,
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215
4
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressively ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
CD Player Operation
NOTE:
•
The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position and the volume control ON before the CD
player will operate.
•
This Radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW) compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting The Compact Disc
CAUTION!
This CD player will accept only 4–3/4 inch (12 cm)
discs only. The use of other sized discs may damage
the CD player mechanism.
You may either insert or eject a disc with the radio OFF.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
OFF, the display will show the time of day. If you insert
a disc with the ignition OFF, the display will show the
time of day for about 5 seconds, then go out.
If the power is ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD
mode and begin to play when you insert the disc. The
display will show the track number and index time in
minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track
one.
216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Seek
Press the top of the SEEK button for the next selection on
the CD. Press the bottom of the button to return to the
beginning of the current selection, or return to the
beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the
first 10 seconds of the current selection.
EJT — Eject
Press the EJT button and the disc will unload and move
to the entrance for easy removal. The unit will switch to
the radio mode.
If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds, it will be
reloaded. The radio mode will continue to appear.
The disc can be ejected with the radio OFF.
FF/TUNE/RW
Press FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will begin to
fast forward until FF is released. The RW (Reverse)
button works in a similar manner.
RND — Random Play
Press the RND button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
Press TUNE FF to fast forward through the tracks. Press
the FF button a second time to stop the fast forward
feature. If TUNE RW is pressed, the current track will
reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217
4
CD/DVD Changer Operation
Press the MODE button to select between the CD player
and the optional remote CD/DVD changer.
Time
Press the TIME button to change the display from
elapsed CD or DVD playing time to time of day.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files, however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
tions.
Supported media (disc types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CD-ROM, CD-R and CD-RW.
Supported medium formats (file systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
Maximum number of directory levels: 15
•
Maximum number of files: 255
•
Maximum number of folders: 100
•
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator 9.9 anda3
character extension)
•
Level 2: 31 (including a separator 9.9 anda3
character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as 9keep disc open after
writing9 are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 file formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.mp3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.mp3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
MPEG
Specification
Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz)
Bit rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219
4
Playback of MP3 files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
•
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the Disc at Once option before
writing to the disc.
Operation Instructions - (CD Mode For MP3 Audio
Play)
SEEK Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
Pressing the SEEK + button plays the next MP3 File.
Pressing the SEEK 2 button plays the beginning of the
MP3 file. Pressing the button within the first ten seconds
plays the previous file.
INFO Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
Press and INFO button while playing MP3 disc. The
radio scrolls through the following TAG information:
Song Title, Artist, File Name, and Folder Name (if avail-
able).
Press the INFO button once more to return to 9elapsed
time9 priority mode.
220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RW/FF (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
Press the FF side of the button to move forward through
the MP3 selection. Press the RW side of the button to
move back through the MP3 selection.
AM/FM Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
Switches back to Radio mode.
RND Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
Pressing this button plays files randomly.
DIR Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
Press the DIR Button to display folders, when playing an
MP3 discs that have a file/folder structure. Press DISC
up (button 1) or DISC down (button 5) to move through
the folders. Press the SET button to select a folder.
Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to Hands Free Phone section of the Owner’s
Manual.
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
Equipped)
Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner’s
Manual.
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VESt) (If Equipped)
Refer to 6 Disc CD/DVD Changer (RDV) section of the
Owner’s Manual.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221
4
SALES CODE REV — AM & FM STEREO RADIO
WITH CD PLAYER AND CD/DVD CHANGER
CONTROLS
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower left
side of your radio faceplate.
Radio Operation
Power/Volume Control
Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio on. Turn the
volume control clockwise to increase the volume.
NOTE: Power to operate the radio is supplied through
the ignition switch. It must be in the ON or ACC position
to operate the radio.
PTY (Program Type)
Pressing the INFO button once while in FM mode will
turn on the PTY mode for 5 seconds. If no action is taken
during the 5 second time out, the PTY icon will turn off.
Pressing the TUNE button within 5 seconds will allow
the program format type to be selected. Many radio
stations do not currently broadcast PTY information.
REV Radio
222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Toggle the TUNE button to select the following format types:
Program Type Radio Display
Adult Hits Adult Hit
Classical Classical
Classic Rock Classic Rock
College College
Country Country
Information Inform
Jazz Jazz
Foreign Language Language
News News
Nostalgia Nostalgia
Oldies Oldies
Personality Personality
Public Public
Rhythm and Blues R & B
Religious Music Religious Music
Program Type Radio Display
Religious Talk Religious Talk
Rock Rock
Soft Soft
Soft Rock Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues SoftR&B
Sports Sports
Talk Talk
Top 40 Top 40
Weather Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected PTY name. The PTY
function only operates when in the FM and Satellite (if
equipped) modes.
The radio display will flash “SEEK” and the selected PTY
program type when searching for the next PTY station. If
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223
4
no station is found with the selected PTY program type,
the radio will return to the last preset station.
If a preset button is activated while in the PTY (Program
Type) mode, the PTY mode will be exited and the radio
will tune to the preset station.
Mode
Press the MODE button to select between, AM, FM, CD,
CD/DVD changer or the Satellite Radio (if equipped).
When the Satellite Radio (if equipped) is selected “SA”
will appear in your radio display.
A disc may remain in the radio while in the Satellite or
radio mode.
Seek
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
station in either the AM, FM or Satellite mode. Press the
top of the button to seek up and the bottom to seek down.
The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you
make another selection. Holding the button in will by-
pass stations without stopping until you release it.
Tuning
Press the TUNE control up or down to increase or
decrease the frequency. If you press and hold the button,
the radio will continue to tune until you release the
button. The frequency will be displayed and continu-
ously updated while the button is pressed.
Balance
The Balance control adjusts the left-to-right speaker bal-
ance. Press the AUDIO button, select BALANCE, then
press SEEK + or SEEK 2 to adjust the balance.
Fade
The Fade control provides for balance between the front
and rear speakers. Press the AUDIO button, select FADE,
then press SEEK + or SEEK 2 to adjust the fade balance.
224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Tone Control
The Bass and/or Treble controls sound for the desired
tone. Press the AUDIO button, select Bass or TREBLE,
then press SEEK + or SEEK 2 to increase or decrease
amplification of the band.
To Set The Radio Push-Button Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to push-button memory, press the SET button.
SET 1 will show in the display window. Select the
push-button you wish to lock onto this station and press
and release that button. If a station is not selected within
5 seconds after pressing the SET button, the station will
continue to play but will not be locked into push-button
memory.
You may add a second station to each push-button by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 10 AM and 10 FM
stations to be locked into memory. You can recall the
stations stored in SET 2 memory by pressing the push-
button twice.
To Change From Clock To Radio Mode
Press the TIME button to change the display between
radio frequency and time.
General Information
This radio complies with Part 15 of FCC rules and with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference,
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225
4
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressively ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
CD Player Operation
NOTE:
•
The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position and the volume control ON before the CD
player will operate.
•
This Radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW) compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multi-session compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting The Compact Disc
CAUTION!
This CD player will accept only 4–3/4 inch (12 cm)
discs only. The use of other sized discs may damage
the CD player mechanism.
You may either insert or eject a disc with the radio OFF.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
OFF, the display will show the time of day. If you insert
a disc with the ignition OFF, the display will show the
time of day for about 5 seconds, then go out.
If the power is ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD
mode and begin to play when you insert the disc. The
display will show the track number and index time in
minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track
one.
226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Seek
Press the top of the SEEK button for the next selection on
the CD. Press the bottom of the button to return to the
beginning of the current selection, or return to the
beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the
first 10 seconds of the current selection.
EJT — Eject
Press the EJT button and the disc will unload and move
to the entrance for easy removal. The unit will switch to
the radio mode.
If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds, it will be
reloaded. The radio mode will continue to appear.
The disc can be ejected with the radio OFF.
FF/TUNE/RW
Press FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will begin to
fast forward until FF is released. The RW (Reverse)
button works in a similar manner.
RND — Random Play
Press the RND button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
Press TUNE FF to fast forward through the tracks. Press
the FF button a second time to stop the fast forward
feature. If TUNE RW is pressed, the current track will
reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227
4
CD/DVD Changer Operation
Press the MODE button to select between the CD player
and the optional remote CD/DVD changer.
Time
Press the TIME button to change the display from
elapsed CD or DVD playing time to time of day.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files, however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
tions.
Supported media (disc types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CD-ROM, CD-R and CD-RW.
Supported medium formats (file systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
Maximum number of directory levels: 15
•
Maximum number of files: 255
•
Maximum number of folders: 100
•
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator 9.9 anda3
character extension)
•
Level 2: 31 (including a separator 9.9 anda3
character extension)
Multi-session disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multi-session discs may contain combinations of normal
228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as 9keep disc open after
writing9 are most likely multi-session discs. The use of
multi-session for CD audio or MP3 playback may result
in longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 file formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.mp3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.mp3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
MPEG
Specification
Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz)
Bit rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229
4
Playback of MP3 files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•
Medium formats - Multi-session discs may take longer
to load than not multi-session discs
•
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the Disc at Once option before
writing to the disc.
Operation Instructions - (CD Mode For MP3 Audio
Play)
SEEK Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
Pressing the SEEK + button plays the next MP3 File.
Pressing the SEEK 2 button plays the beginning of the
MP3 file. Pressing the button within the first ten seconds
plays the previous file.
INFO Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
Press and INFO button while playing MP3 disc. The
radio scrolls through the following TAG information:
Song Title, Artist, File Name, and Folder Name (if avail-
able).
Press the INFO button once more to return to 9elapsed
time9 priority mode.
230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RW/FF (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
Press the FF side of the button to move forward through
the MP3 selection. Press the RW side of the button to
move back through the MP3 selection.
AM/FM Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
Switches back to Radio mode.
RND Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
Pressing this button plays files randomly.
DIR Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play)
Press the DIR Button to display folders, when playing an
MP3 discs that have a file/folder structure. Press DISC
up (button 1) or DISC down (button 5) to move through
the folders. Press the SET button to select a folder.
Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to Hands Free Phone section of the Owner’s
Manual.
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
Equipped)
Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner’s
Manual.
Operating Instructions — MP3 Player, Portable
Walkman
An MP3 player can be connected to the audio system.
Connect the cables to the RCA jacks located on the front
of the CD/DVD changer.
NOTE: Follow the manufactures instructions for the
correct colors when connecting the RCA cables. (Refer to
the illustration below).
Operating Instructions — Video
Games/Camcorders
A video game unit or camcorder can be connected to the
rear audio/video system. Connect the cables to the RCA
jacks located on the front of the CD/DVD changer.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231
4
NOTE: To operate a video game unit a DC to AC
adapter may be required, plug the adapter into any
power outlet.
Listed below is the standard RCA
Jack/Cable connection. You may also
want to refer to the manufacture’s
instructions for the correct colors
when connecting the RCA cables.
1. Video in (yellow)
2. Left audio in (white)
3. Right audio in (red)
NOTE: MP3 player’s, video game systems, camcorders
connected to the RCA jacks and CD’s or DVD’s inserted
into the radio, can be heard through the headphones or
the cabin when AUX Mode is selected.
6 DISC CD/DVD CHANGER (RDV) — IF EQUIPPED
The Rear Seat Audio/Video System allows passengers to
listen to a CD or DVD from the 6 disc CD/DVD changer
through wireless headphones, while the front seat pas-
sengers listen to either AM/FM, Cassette or CDs from the
radio speakers. A remote control is provided for func-
tions such as changing tracks or DVD functions, as well
as selecting discs loaded in the 6 disc CD/DVD changer
while listening to the Rear Audio/Video System.
The Rear Seat Audio/Video System may be available in a
base and premium version. The premium version in-
cludes a six disc changer, remote control and two sets of
wireless headphones. The base version includes a single
disc player and remote control.
The CD/DVD Changer will play CD-R, CD-RW, CD-
Audio and DVD Video disc formats. The video screen
will turn on automatically once a DVD is inserted into the
changer.
232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position before the CD/DVD changer will operate.
Operating Instructions — CD/DVD Changer
Loading The CD/DVD Changer
The premium version has a multi-disc changer,
and will accept up to six discs. The base
version is a single-disc player, and will only
accept one disc.
To insert disc(s) into the changer, follow the instructions
shown:
1. On vehicles equipped with the premium version,
select and press any numbered button without an illumi-
nated light above it.
2. Gently insert the disc with the label facing up while
the light below the loading slot is illuminated. On
vehicles equipped with the premium version the light
above the chosen button will also be flashing, indicating
Six Disc DVD Changer
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233
4
which numbered position the disc will be loaded into.
The disc will automatically be pulled into the CD/DVD
changer.
3. Upon insertion, the disc will begin to play, and the
light below the loading slot will turn off. On vehicles
equipped with the premium version the light above the
chosen button will remain illuminated.
4. Repeat the process for loading any additional CD/
DVDs into the premium version multi-disc changer. The
CD/DVD changer will stop while additional CD/DVDs
are loaded.
If the radio volume control is ON, the unit will switch
from radio to CD/DVD mode and the video screen will
turn on. If the DVD supports the autoplay feature, play
will begin automatically in approximately 10 seconds,
after the DVD disc menu is displayed. If the DVD does
not play automatically, press the ENTER button on the
remote control or on the side of the video screen to select
play from the menu options. The radio display will show
the chapter number and index time in hours and minutes
of the DVD, or the track number, minutes and second of
the CD.
NOTE:
•
You may eject a disc with the radio OFF.
•
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
OFF, the DVD will automatically be pulled into the
DVD changer and the display will show the time of
day.
•
It is recommended to label home made burned discs
with a permanent marker instead of adhesive labels.
These types of labels may become loose and cause the
disc to be stuck in the DVD player. This may cause
permanent damage to the DVD mechanism.
234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
EJECT (EJT) Button
If there is a disc in the changer, press the EJT button and
the disc will eject. If you do not remove the disc within 10
seconds, it will be reloaded and the display will show
PAUSE. The radio mode will continue to operate.
To eject additional discs from the premium version
multi-disc changer, first select the numbered button
where the disc is located and then press the EJT button.
Operating Instructions — Remote Control
NOTE: Aim the remote control at the radio located on
the center of the instrument panel and press the desired
button. Direct sunlight or objects blocking the line of
sight may affect the function of the remote control.
Remote Control
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235
4
Remote Control Buttons
1. Headphone Transmitter
2. Menu Up/Next Track/Chapter
3. Menu Left/Fast Rewind
4. Return
5. Setup
6. Pause/Play
7. Mute
8. Display
9. Mode
10. Program Down - Previous Disc
11. Program Up - Next Disc
12. Slow
13. Stop
14. Menu
15. Menu Down/Previous Track/Chapter
16. Menu Right/Fast Forward
Remote Control Buttons
17. Enter
18. Light
Headphone Transmitter Button (1)
The headphone transmitter button on the remote control
and the power button on the headphones must be turned
ON before sound can be heard from the headphones. On
some radios the headphone symbol will flash for ap-
proximately 5 seconds in the radio display, indicating the
headphones are in use.
ARROW Buttons (2, 3, 15, 16)
These arrow buttons only function in CD/ DVD mode.
Use the arrow buttons to toggle through the disc menu
screen options.
236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RTN Button (4)
This button only functions in CD/DVD mode. Press this
button to return to the previous menu when in the disc
menu mode.
SETUP Button (5)
This button only functions in CD/DVD mode. Press the
button after pressing the STOP button to access the set up
menu. Use the right and left arrows to move between
tabs for language, rating, mark, audio and aspect. Use the
up and down arrows to move between options within
each tab.
To change an item highlighted in blue, press ENTER. This
should cause the highlight to turn yellow. Again, using
the up and down arrows will cause the arrow to move up
or down. Once the arrow is on the desired selection, press
ENTER. When finished, press setup or play to return to
playing the CD/DVD or Menu to return to the disc
menu.
PAUSE/PLAY Button (6)
This button only functions in DVD video mode. Press this
button once to pause the video, press a second time to
play the video.
MUTE Button (7)
This button mutes audio playing through the DVD
player.
DISP Button (8)
This button only functions in DVD video mode. When a
DVD video is playing, press this button to display the
play menu options.
MODE Button (9)
•
With DVD Radio (REV) and DVD changer, this button
changes between radio DVD, Radio AUX Jacks and
DVD changer input.
•
All other radios: No Function.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237
4
This button changes between available modes and can be
heard in the headphones.
PROG UP/DOWN Buttons (10, 11)
PROG UP selects the next disc loaded in the changer.
PROG DOWN selects the previous disc loaded in the
changer.
SLOW Button (12)
This button only functions in DVD video mode. Press this
button to advance the video. If the DVD is paused,
pressing this button will advance the video frame by
frame.
STOP Button (13)
This button only functions in DVD video mode. Press this
button to stop the DVD.
MENU Button (14)
This button only functions in DVD video mode. Press this
button to select the DVD disc menu.
NEXT/PREV Buttons (2, 15)
Press the up arrow or the NEXT button for the next
chapter or track on the disc. Press the down arrow or
PREV button to return to the beginning of the current
chapter or track. Press the down arrow or PREV button
twice within two seconds to return to the previous
chapter or track. Each press of the NEXT/PREV button
up or down will toggle through the chapters or tracks.
FF/RW Buttons (3, 16)
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) once and the CD/DVD
changer will begin to fast forward until the FF button is
released. The RW (Reverse) button works in a similar
manner.
ENTER Button (17)
This button only functions in DVD video mode. Use the
ENTER button to enter selections from the menu screens.
Use the arrow buttons to toggle through the menu screen
options.
238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Light Button (18)
Pressing this button illuminates the buttons on the re-
mote control.
Remote Control Battery Service
•
To replace the batteries for the remote control slide the
cover rearward.
The replacement batteries for the remote control are two
AAA batteries.
Operating Instructions — Video Screen
Push up on the release button to lower the video screen.
Lowering Video Screen
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239
4
1. Screen Width Button
Changes the width of the screen picture.
2. Enter Button
This button will enter the selection from the
on-screen menu.
3. Brightness Button
Changes the brightness of the screen picture.
Video Screen and Controls
240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions — Headphones
1. Power Button
2. Volume Control
3. Power Indicator
Power Button
Pressing the power button will turn the headphones
ON/OFF. An indicator light will illuminate on the head-
phone earpiece to indicate the headphones are ON.
NOTE:
•
The headphones will turn OFF automatically in ap-
proximately 3 minutes if they lose the signal form the
system or when the radio or rear audio/video system
is turned OFF.
Volume Control
Rotate the volume control to adjust the volume to the
desired listening level.
Rear Headphones
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241
4
Headphone Battery Service
•
Press the button at the bottom of each headphone
earpiece and lift the cover upward.
•
Replace the battery in each earpiece and reinstall the
cover. The headphones require two AAA batteries.
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference and (2) This device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
If you do not hear sound coming from the headphones,
check for the following conditions:
1. Rear Seat Audio/Video System and headphones are
on. Press the headphone transmitter button (1) on the
remote control and the power button on the headphones.
An indicator light will illuminate on the headphone
earpiece to indicate the headphones are ON.
2. Weak batteries in the headphones.
3. Direct sunlight or objects blocking the line of sight
between the headphone transmitter on the video screen
and the headphones.
Headphone Battery Service
242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions — Auxiliary Input
•
Connect your auxiliary device (video game system,
video camera, or MP3 player) cables to the color coded
auxiliary jacks on the front of the DVD changer. (Refer
to the illustration below).
•
Turn your auxiliary device on and adjust its volume to
mid or high position.
NOTE: Audio can now be heard through the vehicle’s
speaker system or through the headphones (if Rear Seat
Audio is turned ON).
•
Video will be displayed on the screen if connected to a
video device.
•
Your auxiliary device must be disconnected or turned
off to return to DVD changer mode.
NOTE: To operate a video game unit a DC to AC
adapter may be required, plug the adapter into any
power outlet.
Listed below is the standard RCA
Jack/Cable connection. You may also
want to refer to the manufacture’s
instructions for the correct colors
when connecting the RCA cables.
1. Video in (yellow)
2. Left audio in (white)
3. Right audio in (red)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243
4
NAVIGATION SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The navigation system provides maps, turn identifica-
tion, selection menus and instructions for selecting a
variety of destinations and routes. The buttons to operate
the system are located on the instrument panel next to the
analog clock.
Refer to your Navigation User’s Manual for detailed
operating instructions.
The navigation DVD unit is located in the underfloor
storage compartment in the rear cargo area. A single disc
containing map information for the entire United States
and parts of Canada is stored in the DVD unit. Updated
DVD’s are available from your authorized dealer.
To replace the navigation map DVD lift the storage bin
cover and liner in the rear cargo area, press the eject
button and the disc will eject. Gently insert the new disc
into the DVD unit with the label facing up. The disc will
automatically be pulled into the DVD unit.
Navigation DVD Location
244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SATELLITE RADIO — IF EQUIPPED
Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast-
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius™ Satel-
lite Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and talk radio, directly from
its satellites and broadcasting studios.
System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of
SIRIUS audio service that is included with the factory-
installed satellite radio system in your vehicle. You are
also invited to call Sirius to set up your free internet
account so you can listen to Sirius online. For further
information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or
visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com. Please have
the following information available when changing your
subscription:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ENS/SID)
The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Num-
ber can be accessed to retrieve the 12 digit number
through each radio. To access the ESN/SID, refer to the
following steps:
ESN/SID Access With RBB, RAH, REVand RBK
Radios
With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and
the radio OFF, press the CD “EJT” button and Time
buttons simultaneously for 3 seconds. The first four digits
of the twelve-digit ESN/SID number will be displayed.
Press the SEEK UP (+) button to display the next four
digits. Continue to press the SEEK UP (+) button until all
twelve ESN/SID digits have been displayed. The SEEK
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245
4
DOWN (-) will page down until the first four digits are
displayed. The radio will exit the ESN/SID mode when
any other button is pushed, the ignition is turned OFF, or
5 minutes has passed since any button was pushed.
ESN/SID Access With RBP, RBU, RAZ, RB1 and
RBQ Radios
With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and
the radio OFF, press the CD Eject and TIME buttons
simultaneously for 3 seconds. All twelve ESN/SID num-
bers will be displayed. The radio will exit the ESN/SID
mode when any other button is pushed, the ignition is
turned OFF, or 5 minutes has passed since any button
was pushed.
Selecting Satellite Mode in RBB, RAH, REV and
RBK Radios
Press the MODE button repeatedly until 9SA9 appears in
the display. A CD or tape may remain in the radio while
in the Satellite radio mode.
Selecting Satellite Mode in RBP, RBU, RAZ, RB1
and RBQ Radios
Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word
9SIRIUS9 appears in the display. These radios will also
display the following:
•
After 3 seconds, the current channel name and channel
number will be displayed for 5 seconds.
•
The current program type and channel number will
then be displayed for 5 seconds.
•
The current channel number will then be displayed
until an action occurs.
A CD or tape may remain in the radio while in the
Satellite radio mode.
246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Selecting a Channel
Press and release the SEEK or TUNE buttons to search for
the next channel. Press the top of the button to search up
and the bottom of the button to search down. Holding the
TUNE button causes the radio to bypass channels until
the button is released.
Press and release the SCAN button (if equipped) to
automatically change channels every 7 seconds. The
radio will pause on each channel for 7 seconds before
moving on to the next channel. The word 9SCAN9 will
appear in the display between each channel change. Press
the SCAN button a second time to stop the search.
NOTE: Channels that may contain objectionable content
can be blocked. Contact Sirius Customer Care at 888-539-
7474 to discuss options for channel blocking or unblock-
ing. Please have your ESN/SID information available.
Storing and Selecting Pre-Set Channels
In addition to the 10 AM and 10 FM pre-set stations, you
may also commit 10 satellite stations to push button
memory. These satellite channel pre-set stations will not
erase any AM or FM pre-set memory stations. Follow the
memory pre-set procedures that apply to your radio.
Using the PTY (Program Type) Button (If
Equipped)
Follow the PTY button instructions that apply to your
radio.
PTY Button (SCAN(
When the desired program type is obtained, press the
9SCAN9 button within five seconds. The radio will play 7
seconds of the selected channel before moving to the next
channel of the selected program type. Press the 9SCAN9
button a second time to stop the search.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247
4
NOTE: Pressing the 9SEEK9 or 9SCAN9 button while
performing a music type scan will change the channel by
one and stop the search. Pressing a pre-set memory
button during a music type scan, will call up the memory
channel and stop the search.
PTY Button (SEEK(
When the desired program is obtained, press the 9SEEK9
button within five seconds. The channel will change to
the next channel that matches the program type selected.
Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location or strap items to
the trunk lid around the trunk lid antenna (if equipped).
Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the
antenna will cause decreased performance. Larger lug-
gage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward
as possible, within the loading design of the rack. Do not
place items directly on or above the antenna.
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons.
•
The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
•
Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
form of short audio mutes.
•
Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
•
Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel at the 3 and 9 o’clock
positions.
The right hand rocker switch has a push button in the
center and controls the volume and mode of the sound
system. Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase
the volume and pressing the bottom of the rocker switch
will decrease the volume. Pressing the center button
changes the operation of the radio from AM to FM to
Tape or CD mode depending on which radio is in the
vehicle.
The left hand rocker switch has a push button in the
center. The function of the left hand switch is different
depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left hand rocker switch
operation in each mode:
Radio Operation
Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch
will SEEK down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left hand switch
will tune to the next pre-set station that you have
programmed in the radio pre-set push-button.
CD Player
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
will go to the beginning of the current track or to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
after the current track begins to play.
If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the
second track, three times, it will play the third, etc.
The button in the center of the left hand switch has no
function in this mode.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249
4
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep the CD/DVD discs in good condition, take the
following precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper, paper CD labels, or tape to the
disc; avoid scratching the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, cleaners,
or antistatic sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES
Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being ON in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition
is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during cellular phone operation.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Air Conditioning and Heating System is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather.
250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Manual Air Conditioning and Heating System
Power Button
When the “POWER” button is pressed the indicator will
illuminate and the blower will run at the speed selected
by the front blower control. When the button is pressed a
second time the indicator light turns off, the blower will
turn off and the system will be positioned in the recircu-
lation mode.
Blower Control
The Blower controls the amount of air delivered to
the passenger compartment. There are four blower
speeds.
The fan speed increases as you
move the control clockwise.
Manual Heating and A/C Controls
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251
4
Dual Zone Temperature Control — If Equipped
With the Dual Zone Temperature Control System, each
front seat occupant can independently control the tem-
perature of air coming from the outlets on their side of
the vehicle.
This is accomplished by having a separate temperature
control lever for both the driver and front seat passenger.
The blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures
while the red area indicates warmer temperatures.
Mode Control
The mode control allows you to
choose from several patterns of air
distribution.
NOTE: To improve your selection choices, the system
allows you to operate at intermediate positions between
the major modes. These intermediate positions are iden-
tified by the small dots.
Dual Zone Temperature Control
252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each
of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the
flow of air. Moving the air vane knob on the center
outlets down, will close off the air flow from the center
outlets. The thumbwheel next to the outboard outlets can
be rotated to regulate or shut off the air flow from these
outlets.
Panel Outlets
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253
4
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the instrument panel outlets, floor
outlets and defrost. A slight amount of air is also directed
through the side window demister outlets.
NOTE: In many temperature lever positions, the bi-
level mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the
panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Bi-Level Outlets
254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window demister
outlets.
Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window
demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or snowy
conditions. It allows you to stay comfortable while keep-
ing the windshield clear.
Floor Outlets Mix Outlets
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255
4
Defrost Mode
Air comes from the windshield and side window demist
outlets. Use this setting when necessary to defrost your
windshield and side windows.
NOTE: For improved safety, the compressor is activated
and the recirculation mode is deactivated when Mix or
Defrost modes are selected. This is done to assist in
drying the air and it will help in keeping the windows
from fogging.
Manual Air Conditioning Operation
To turn on the air conditioning, set the front
blower control to any speed and press the A/C
button which is located next to the recirculation
button. An indicator light on the A/C button shows that
the air conditioning is on.
NOTE: The indicator light in the “POWER” button must
be on for the climate control system to operate.
Cool dehumidified air comes through the outlets selected
by the Mode Control. To turn off the air conditioning,
press the A/C button a second time. The indicator light
will turn off.
Defrost Outlets
256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
•
The compressor will not engage until the engine has
been running for a few seconds.
•
If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the A/C air filter (ATC equipped
vehicles only) and the front of the A/C condenser for
an accumulation of dirt or insects. The A/C condenser
is located in front of the radiator. The A/C air filter is
located under the instrument panel on the passenger
side.
•
Fabric type fascia protectors tend to block the amount
of air to the condenser and may reduce air condition-
ing performance.
Economy Mode
If economy mode is desired, press theA/C button to turn
off the indicator light, and the A/C compressor. Move the
temperature control lever to the desired temperature.
Recirculation Control
Press the recirculation button to recirculate the
air inside the vehicle. This is located next to the
A/C button. An indicator light on the button
shows that air is being recirculated. Use the
recirculation mode to rapidly cool the inside of the
vehicle. The recirculation mode can also be used to
temporarily block out outside odors, smoke, and dust.
NOTE:
•
When the ignition switch is turned OFF, the recircula-
tion feature will be cancelled.
•
In cold weather, use of the Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation
mode is not allowed in the Mix and Defrost modes to
improve window clearing operation. Recirculation
will be disabled automatically if these modes are
selected.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257
4
•
If the recirculation button is pressed while in the Mix
or Defrost mode, the indicator light in the recirculation
button will flash 3 times indicating that recirculation is
not allowed.
A/C Recirculation Programming
The recirculation control is programmed to cancel the
recirculation mode when the ignition key is turned OFF
and will reset to outside air mode when the ignition key
is turned ON. The frequent use of outside air will help
keep odors from building up within the air conditioner-
heater housing. It is recommended that the recirculation
mode be used as little as possible, especially in humid
climates.
For hot and dry climates, or people who are allergic to
pollen and find frequent use of the recirculation mode
necessary, the recirculation mode can be programmed to
not automatically reset to the outside mode by using the
following procedures:
•
Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
•
Set the mode control to “PANEL”.
•
Depress and hold in the “POWER” button.
•
Start the engine, and continue to hold in the “POWER”
button until the indicator light starts flashing repeat-
edly.
•
Press the recirculation button until the indicator light
remains lit.
•
The selection will be stored when the ignition switch is
turned OFF or if the “POWER” button is pressed.
If the recirculation indicator light is lit, the recirculation
mode will not reset when the engine is started. If the
recirculation indicator light is not lit, the recirculation
mode will reset to the outside air mode when the engine
is started. The programmed status can be changed back
and forth by following the above mentioned procedure.
258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Dual-Zone Automatic Temperature Control
The Dual Zone Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
System automatically maintains the interior comfort level
desired by the driver and front seat passenger. This is
accomplished by using two infrared sensors located in
the center of the instrument panel. The two infrared
sensors independently measure the surface temperature
of the driver and front seat passenger. Based on the
sensor input, the system automatically adjusts the air
temperature, the airflow volume, the airflow distribu-
tion, and amount of inside air recirculation to maintain
front seat occupant comfort, even under changing out-
side weather conditions.
To operate the system, press either the 9AUTO HI9 or
9AUTO LO9 buttons. The system now automatically
regulates the heating and air conditioning system includ-
ing blower speed, outlet air temperature, and airflow
distribution through the various outlets within the in-
strument panel. Using the 9TEMP9 buttons, adjust the
Dual-Zone Automatic Temperature Control
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259
4
temperature you would like the system to maintain.
When the system is set to your comfort level, it is not
necessary to change the settings. You will experience the
greatest efficiency by allowing the system to function
automatically. The system will operate fully automati-
cally in either 9AUTO HI9 or 9AUTO LO9. The 9AUTO
LO9 setting will limit the maximum fan speed and should
be used when more quiet operation is desired. Use the
9AUTO HI9 setting when the quickest cool-down or
warm-up performance is desired.
NOTE:
•
It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode and fan speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
•
The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric by
selecting the US/M customer programmable feature.
Refer to the “Electronic Vehicle Information Center-
Customer Programmable Features” in Section 3 of this
manual.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the automatic
mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain
off and “DELAY” will appear in the display until the
engine warms up. An estimate of the time remaining
until the “DELAY” is complete will appear periodically
in the display. However, the fan will engage immediately
if the defrost mode is selected or by pushing the blower
switch and manually adjusting the fan speed.
This feature may be disabled using the following proce-
dure:
•
Press and hold the Heated Rear Window and Auto LO
buttons for 5 seconds.
•
The “DELAY” symbol will flash to indicate that the
feature as been disabled.
260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
This feature may be enabled using the following proce-
dure:
•
Press and hold the Heated Rear Window and Auto HI
buttons for 5 seconds.
•
The “DELAY” symbol will flash to indicate that the
feature as been enabled.
Power Button
This button turns the entire system ON/OFF. When the
system is turned on it will return to the previous settings.
Dual/Single Zone Operation
When 9DUAL9 is displayed in the ATC control unit, the
driver and passenger air outlet temperatures can be
individually adjusted from the two independent 9TEMP9
buttons. When a front seat passenger is not present,
pressing the 9DUAL9 button will match the passenger’s
temperature setting to the driver’s temperature setting.
This will help equalize air outlet temperatures across the
left and right side of the instrument panel. The outside
temperature will replace the passenger’s temperature
setting in the display. Pressing the 9DUAL9 button a
second time or adjusting the passenger’s 9TEMP9 button
will return the system to dual independent temperature
operation.
Manual Operation
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features. The indicator light in both the 9AUTO HI9 or
9AUTO LO9 buttons will turn off when the system is
being used in the manual mode. The fan speed, airflow
distribution, and outside air/recirculated air can be
manually adjusted.
NOTE: Each of these features operate independently
from each other. If any one feature is controlled manually,
the remaining features will continue to operate automati-
cally.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261
4
The front blower control can be set to any fixed
blower speed by pressing the rocker switch up or
down. This allows the front occupants to control the
volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the auto
mode. The fan will now operate at a fixed speed until
additional speeds are selected or until either the 9AUTO
HI9 or 9AUTO LO9 buttons are pressed. The system will
continue to automatically adjust air temperature and
airflow distribution.
The operator can also select the direction of the air by
pressing the mode control rocker switch located to the
left of the A/C button and selecting one of the following
positions.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each
of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the
flow of air. Moving the knob up, down, left, or right will
direct the air accordingly. The thumbwheel next to each
outlet can be rotated to reduce or shut off the air flow
from these outlets.
Panel Outlets
262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Bi-Level Mode Air comes from both the instrument panel outlets and
floor outlets. A slight amount of air is also directed
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the bi-level
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the panel
outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Bi-Level Outlets
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263
4
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window demister
outlets.
Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window
demist outlets. This mode is not used when operating in
either 9AUTO HI9 or 9AUTO LO9. This mode should be
used when airflow to the floor and windshield is desired.
Floor Outlets Mix Outlets
264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Defrost Mode
Air comes from the windshield and side window demist
outlets. Use this setting when necessary to defrost your
windshield and side windows. If a fog or mist on the
windshield or side glass starts to impair visibility, press
the front blower button and increase the fan speed to
maximum.
NOTE: While operating in 9AUTO HI9 or 9AUTO LO9,
the system will not automatically sense the presence fog,
mist, or ice on the windshield. The defrost button must be
pressed to clear the windshield and side glass.
Depress the “A/C” button to turn on and off the
air conditioning during manual operation only.
Cool dehumidified air comes through the outlets
selected by the Mode Control. To turn off the air condi-
tioning, press the A/C button a second time. The A/C
symbol in the display will turn off.
NOTE: If a fog or mist appears on the windshield or
side glass, press the “A/C” button to engage the com-
pressor or press the defrost button. If a fog or mist on the
Defrost Outlets
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265
4
windshield or side glass starts to impair visibility, press
the front blower button and increase the fan speed to
maximum.
Recirculation Control
When the outside air contains smoke, odors,
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
pressing the recirculation button. The recircu-
lation mode should only be used temporarily. The recir-
culate symbol will illuminate in the display when this
button is selected. Push the button a second time to allow
outside air into the vehicle.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of the recirculation mode
may lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation
mode is not allowed in the Mix and Defrost modes to
improve window clearing operation. Recirculation will
be disabled automatically if these modes are selected.
A/C Recirculation Programming
The recirculation control is programmed to cancel the
recirculation mode when the ignition key is turned OFF
and will reset to the outside air mode when the ignition
key is turned “ON”. The frequent use of outside air will
help keep odors from building up within the air
conditioner-heater housing. It is recommended that the
recirculation mode be used as little as possible, especially
in humid climates.
For hot and dry climates, or people who are allergic to
pollen and find frequent use of the recirculation mode
necessary, the recirculation mode can be programmed to
not automatically reset to the outside mode by using the
following procedures:
•
Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
•
Press and hold the recirculation button.
266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
While holding the recirculation button, turn the igni-
tion switch to the “RUN” position.
•
Continue holding the recirculation button for 4 sec-
onds, then release.
The recirculation control is now programmed so that the
recirculation mode will not reset to the outside air mode
when the engine is restarted. The recirculation program-
ming can be changed back by repeating this procedure.
Rear Blower Operation
To operate the rear fan, press the 9REAR9 button. The first
time this button is pressed the 9REAR AUTO9 display
will illuminate indicating that the rear fan speed is
automatically controlled. To manually control the rear
fan speed, press the 9REAR9 button again and only
9REAR9 will illuminate in the display. This allows the rear
seat occupants to control the rear fan speed using the
switch located in the center console between the second
row seats. By pressing the 9REAR9 button a third time,
the rear fan will shut off.
When the ATC display reads 9REAR AUTO9 or when the
rear fan is off, the switch located in the center console
between the second row seats is not functional. When the
ATC display reads 9REAR9, only the rear seat occupants
can control the rear fan speed from the rear switch. When
in the “REAR” mode, the rear occupants can set the rear
switch to any fan speed including 9OFF9,or9AUTO9.
While in the 9AUTO9 position, the rear fan speed will be
automatically controlled.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles
must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant
to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. A 50% solution of ethylene
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267
4
glycol antifreeze coolant in water is recommended. Refer
to section 7, Maintenance Procedures, of this manual for
proper coolant selection.
Winter Operation
To insure the best possible heater and defroster perfor-
mance, make sure the engine cooling system is function-
ing properly and the proper amount, type, and concen-
tration of coolant is used. Refer to section 7, Maintenance
Procedures, of this manual for proper coolant selection.
Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months
is not recommended because it may cause window
fogging.
Vacation Storage
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air condi-
tioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh
air and high blower setting. This will insure adequate
system lubrication to minimize the possibility of com-
pressor damage when the system is started again.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild rainy
or humid weather. To clear the windows, use the A/C
button to reduce the humidity inside the vehicle.
Fogging on the inside of the windshield can be quickly
removed by pressing the defrost button and increasing
the blower speed.
Do not use the Recirculation mode without the A/C
button for long periods as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Before driving, always make sure the air intake located
directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions
such as leaves, ice, or snow, which could reduce airflow
and/or plug the water drain tube inside the plenum.
268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
A/C Air Filter — If Equipped
On vehicles equipped with Automatic Temperature Con-
trol (ATC), the climate control system filters out dust and
pollen from the air. Refer to section 7 “Air Conditioning”
for filter replacement instructions.
Outside Temperature Display
The outside temperature can be shown in the ATC
display by pressing the 9OUTSIDE TEMP9 button. After
pressing this button, the front seat passenger’s tempera-
ture setting display will be replaced with the current
outside temperature. Press the 9OUTSIDE TEMP9 button
again or press the passenger’s 9TEMP9 button to return
the display to the passenger’s temperature setting.
Electric Rear Window Defroster
Press this button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated side mirrors. A light in
the button will illuminate to indicate the rear window
defroster is ON. The defroster automatically turns off
after about 10 minutes of operation.
CAUTION!
To avoid damaging the electrical conductors of the
rear window defroster, do not use scrapers, sharp
instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window.
Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm
water.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269
4
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
m Starting Procedures .....................275
▫ Automatic Transmission ................276
▫ Normal Starting (Above 32°F / 0°C) ........276
▫ Extremely Cold Weather Starting (Below 220°F /
–29°C) .............................276
▫ High Altitude Starting (Above 4,000 Ft. /
1219m)............................276
▫ If Engine Fails To Start .................277
▫ After Starting ........................278
m Engine Block Heater — If Equipped .........278
m Automatic Transmission ..................278
▫ Brake/Transmission Interlock System .......279
▫ Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock
System .............................280
▫ Reset Mode - Electronic Transmission .......280
m AutoStick ............................282
▫ AutoStickt Operation ..................282
▫ AutoStickt General Information ...........282
m All Wheel Drive — If Equipped ............284
5
m Parking Brake .........................285
m Brake System ..........................287
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System ................288
m Power Steering ........................290
m Driving On Slippery Surfaces ..............291
▫ Acceleration .........................291
▫ Traction ............................292
m Driving Through Water ..................292
▫ Flowing/Rising Water ..................292
▫ Shallow Standing Water .................293
m Tire Safety Information ...................294
▫ Tire Markings ........................294
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) ..........298
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure ...........299
m Tires — General Information ...............303
▫ Tire Pressure .........................303
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures .................304
▫ Radial-Ply Tires ......................306
▫ Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped .........307
▫ Limited Use Spare — If Equipped .........307
▫ Tire Spinning ........................308
▫ Tread Wear Indicators ..................309
▫ Life Of Tire .........................309
▫ Replacement Tires .....................310
▫ Alignment And Balance .................311
m Tire Chains ...........................312
272 STARTING AND OPERATING
m Snow Tires ...........................313
m Tire Rotation ..........................313
m Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ........314
▫ Basic TPMS Without EVIC — If Equipped ....317
▫ Basic TPMS With EVIC — If Equipped ......319
▫ Premium TPMS – If Equipped ............320
▫ Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure
Warnings ...........................321
▫ Service Tire System Soon ................322
▫ General Information ...................324
m Fuel Requirements ......................325
▫ 3.8L Gasoline Engines ..................325
▫ 4.0L Gasoline Engines ..................325
▫ Reformulated Gasoline .................326
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ..............326
▫ MMT In Gasoline .....................327
▫ Materials Added To Fuel ................327
▫ Fuel System Cautions ..................327
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings ..............328
m Adding Fuel ..........................329
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ...............329
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ............330
m Vehicle Loading ........................331
▫ Vehicle Certification Label ...............331
▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) .......332
▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) .........332
STARTING AND OPERATING 273
5
▫ Overloading .........................332
▫ Loading ............................333
m Trailer Towing .........................334
▫ Common Towing Definitions .............334
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification ...............338
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) ......................338
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight ..............341
▫ Towing Requirements ..................342
▫ Towing Tips .........................347
m Recreational Towing (Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . .348
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
(Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The
Ground) ............................348
274 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
WARNING!
• Be sure to turn off the engine and remove the
key from the ignition switch if you want to rest
or sleep in your car. Accidents can be caused by
inadvertently moving the gear selection lever or
by pressing the accelerator pedal. This may
cause excessive heat in the exhaust system, re-
sulting in overheating and vehicle fire which
may cause serious or fatal injuries.
• NEVER
leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in
the ignition. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build up
may cause serious injury or death.
STARTING AND OPERATING 275
5
Automatic Transmission
The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Depress the
brake pedal before shifting into any driving gear.
Normal Starting (Above 32°F / 0°C)
1. Do not depress the accelerator.
2. Turn and hold the ignition key in the START position
and release when engine starts.
3. If engine does not start after 3 seconds, depress the
accelerator lightly (while still cranking the engine).
4. If engine does not start after 15 seconds, turn the
ignition key off.
5. Wait 10 to 15 seconds, and repeat steps1—5.
NOTE: This vehicle is equipped with a transmission
shift interlocking system. The brake pedal must be
depressed to shift out of Park (P).
Extremely Cold Weather Starting (Below 220°F /
–29°C)
Follow the same instructions in the “Normal Starting”
procedure.
To insure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an
externally powered electric engine block heater (available
from your dealer) is recommended.
High Altitude Starting (Above 4,000 ft. / 1 219 m)
Follow the same instructions in the “Normal Starting”
procedure.
To insure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an
externally powered electric engine block heater (available
from your dealer) is recommended.
276 STARTING AND OPERATING
If Engine Fails To Start
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” procedure, it may be flooded. Push
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it
there while cranking the engine. This should clear any
excess fuel in case the engine is flooded.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
15 seconds before trying again.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a
booster battery or the battery in another vehicle. This
type of start can be dangerous if done improperly.
See section 6 of this manual for the proper jump
starting procedures and follow them carefully.
If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not
have enough power to continue running when the key is
STARTING AND OPERATING 277
5
released. If this occurs, continue cranking with the accel-
erator pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release the
accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running
smoothly.
If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15
second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal
held to the floor, the “Normal Starting” procedure should
be repeated.
After Starting
The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine
warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms engine coolant and
permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord
to a standard 110-115 volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on
the driver side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap that
is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power
Module.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the cord before driving.
Damage to the 110-115 volt electrical cord could cause
electrocution.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The electronically controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle, may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles.
278 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
•
Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
•
Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
•
Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
•
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of “P” or
“N” if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle
could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the engine is
idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on
the brake pedal.
Brake/Transmission Interlock System
This system prevents you from moving the gear shift out
of PARK and into any gear unless the brake pedal is
pressed. This system is active only while the ignition
switch is in the ACCESSORY or ON position. Always
depress the brake pedal first, before moving the gear
selector out of PARK.
STARTING AND OPERATING 279
5
Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock System
This system prevents the key from being removed unless
the shift lever is in PARK. It also prevents shifting out of
PARK unless the key is in the ACCESSORY or ON
position.
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety
feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and
stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain
service.
Reset Mode - Electronic Transmission
For electrical system malfunctions there is an override for
the interlock system. In order to override this system the
key must be in the ignition with the switch in the ACC or
ON positions. Pull up and rearward on the shifter bezel
ring.
The override can be activated by pressing the pink-
colored tab, which can be accessed through the lower
right corner of the shifter bezel ring. While the override is
pressed, the shifter can be moved out of the park position
without pressing the brake. After operation return the
shifter bezel ring to its original position.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, it is
recommended that you visit a dealer at your earliest
Brake Interlock Override
280 STARTING AND OPERATING
possible convenience. Your dealer has diagnostic equip-
ment to determine if the problem could recur.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL positions into another gear range.
“P” Park
Supplements the parking brake by locking the transmis-
sion. The engine can be started in this range. Never
attempt to use PARK while vehicle is in motion.
Apply parking brake when leaving vehicle in this range.
WARNING!
Never use Park position on an automatic transmission
as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply
parking brake fully when parked to guard against
vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
“R” Reverse
Shift into this range only after the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
“N” Neutral
Engine may be started in this range.
“D” Overdrive
To be used for most city and highway driving, it provides
smoothest upshifts and downshifts and best fuel
economy. When frequent transmission shifting occurs
while using the “D” Overdrive position, such as when
operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions,
(i.e. in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds or
while towing heavy trailers), use theAutoStick mode and
select the “3” range.
NOTE: Using the “3” range in the AutoStick mode
while operating the vehicle under heavy operating con-
ditions will improve performance and extend transmis-
sion life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up.
STARTING AND OPERATING 281
5
AUTOSTICK
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission that offers
manual gear shifting capability to provide you with more
control. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine brak-
ing, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and
improve overall vehicle performance. This system can
also provide you with more control during passing, city
driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving,
trailer towing, and many other situations.
AutoStickT Operation
By placing the selector lever one shift-level below the 9D9
position, it can be moved from side to side. This allows
the driver to select a higher or lower range of gears.
Moving the selector lever to the Left (-) triggers a
downshift and to the Right (+) an upshift. The gear
position will display in the instrument cluster on the
transaxle range indicator.
NOTE: In Autostickt mode, the transaxle will only shift
up or down when the driver moves the selector lever to
the Right (+) for shifting up or to the Left (-) when
shifting down.
AutoStickT General Information
•
You can start out in first or second gear. The system
will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle
speed.
•
If a ratio other than 1st is selected, and the vehicle is
brought to a stop, the transaxle control logic will
automatically select the 1st gear ratio.
•
Starting out in second gear is helpful in snowy or icy
conditions.
•
Avoid using speed control when Autostickt is engaged.
•
The transaxle will automatically shift up when maxi-
mum engine speed is reached while Autostickt is
engaged.
282 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
Transaxle shifting will be more noticeable when Auto-
stickt is engaged.
•
If a low range is selected and the engine accelerates to
the rev limit, the transaxle will automatically select the
next higher ratio.
•
If a downshift would cause the engine to over-speed,
that shift will not occur until it is safe for the engine.
Mostly the transaxle will stay in the manually selected
ratio, however.
•
If the system detects powertrain overheating, the
transaxle will revert to the automatic shift mode and
remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off.
•
If the system detects a problem, it will disable the
AutoStickt mode and the transaxle will return to the
automatic mode until the problem is corrected.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
•
Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
•
Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
•
Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
•
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
STARTING AND OPERATING 283
5
WARNING!
It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of “P” or
“N” if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle
could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the engine is
idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on
the brake pedal.
ALL WHEEL DRIVE — IF EQUIPPED
This feature provides full time, on-demand, All Wheel
Drive (AWD). The system is automatic with no driver
inputs or additional driving skills required. Under nor-
mal driving conditions, the front wheels provide most of
the traction. If the front wheels begin to lose traction,
power is shifted automatically to the rear wheels. The
greater the front wheel traction loss, the greater the
power transfer to the rear wheels.
Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy throttle
input (where one may have no wheel spin), torque will be
sent to the rear in a preemptive effort to improve vehicle
launch and performance characteristics.
CAUTION!
All wheels must have the same size and type tires.
Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire
size may cause failure of the power transfer unit.
284 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKING BRAKE
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch on, the brake light in the instrument cluster will
turn on.
NOTE: This light only shows that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the gear selector in the
Park position. To release the parking brake, pull out on
the parking brake release located on the left side of the
instrument panel.
When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking
brake before placing the gear selector in Park, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the selector out of park. As an
Parking Brake Release
STARTING AND OPERATING 285
5
added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb
on a downhill grade and away from the curb on a uphill
grade.
The parking brake should always be applied when the
driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
•
Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-
ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage
or injury. Also be certain to leave an automatic
transmission in Park, a manual transmission in
Reverse or first gear. Failure to do so may allow the
vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury.
•
NEVER leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in
the ignition. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle
•
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving, failure to do so can lead to brake
problems due to excessive heating of the rear
brakes.
286 STARTING AND OPERATING
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with power assisted brakes as
standard equipment. In the event power assist is lost for
any reason (for example, repeated brake applications
with the engine off), the brakes will still function. How-
ever, the effort required to brake the vehicle will be much
greater than that required with the power system oper-
ating.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You wouldn’t have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
If either of the two hydraulic systems lose
normal capability, the remaining system will
still function with some loss of overall braking
effectiveness. This will be evident by increased
pedal travel during application and greater pedal force
required to slow or stop. In addition, if the malfunction is
caused by an internal leak, as the brake fluid in the
master cylinder drops, the brake warning indicator will
light.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger-
ous. A significant decrease in braking performance or
vehicle stability during braking may occur. It will
take you longer to stop the vehicle or will make your
vehicle harder to control. You could have an accident.
Have the vehicle checked immediately.
STARTING AND OPERATING 287
5
Anti-Lock Brake System
The Anti-Lock Brake System provides increased vehicle
stability and brake performance under most braking
conditions. The system automatically “pumps” the
brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent
wheel lock-up.
WARNING!
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to an accident. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly
on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
WARNING!
•
Anti-lock system (ABS) cannot prevent the natural
laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond
that afforded by the condition of the vehicle
brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
•
The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
•
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
288 STARTING AND OPERATING
The ABS light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake
System. The light will come on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or comes on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not come on when the
Ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the
bulb repaired as soon as possible.
If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Light
remain on, the Anti-Lock brakes (ABS) and Electronic
Brake Force Distribution (EBD) systems are not function-
ing. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you
may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
related motor noises. These noises are the system per-
forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS system
is working properly. This self check occurs each time the
vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can in-
clude ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops.
You also may experience the following when the brake
system goes into Anti-lock:
•
The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop),
•
the clicking sound of solenoid valves,
•
brake pedal pulsations,
STARTING AND OPERATING 289
5
•
and a slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the
end of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
The Anti-Lock Brake System contains sophisticated
electronic equipment that may be susceptible to
interference caused by improperly installed or high
output radio transmitting equipment. This interfer-
ence can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking
capability. Installation of such equipment should be
performed by qualified professionals.
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE: Increased noise levels at the end of the steering
wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate
that there is a problem with the power steering system.
Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering
pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This is
due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This
noise should be considered normal, and it does not in any
way damage the steering system.
290 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-
pery surfaces may cause the front wheels to pull errati-
cally to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when
there is a difference in the surface traction under the front
(driving) wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the
front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
and possibly have an accident. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).
STARTING AND OPERATING 291
5
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precau-
tions should be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front to avoid a collision in a sudden stop.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches deep will
require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent dam-
age to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or cross a road or a path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flow-
ing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
292 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following before
doing so:
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water before
driving through it. Never drive through standing water that
is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the
vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path that is
under waterand if there are any obstacles in the way before
driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through
standing water. This will minimize wave effects.
• Driving through standing water may cause damage to your
vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always inspect your ve-
hicle’s fluids (i.e. engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for
signs of contamination (i.e. fluid that is milky or foamy in
appearance) after driving through standing water. Do not
continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears con-
taminated, as this may result in further damage. Such
damage is not covered by the new vehicle limited warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can cause it to
lockup and stall out and cause serious internal damage to
the engine. Such damage is not covered by the new vehicle
limited warranty.
STARTING AND OPERATING 293
5
WARNING!
•
Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8
km/h) when driving through standing water.
•
Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stop-
ping distances. Therefore, after driving through
standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on
the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
•
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lockup and stall out and leave you
stranded.
•
Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
NOTE:
•
P (Passenger)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Ex-
ample: P215/65R15 95H.
294 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
European Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter 9P9 is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H
•
LT (Light Truck)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
•
Temporary Spare tires are high-pressure compact
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
•
High Flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
STARTING AND OPERATING 295
5
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
(....blank....( = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary Spare tire
31 = Overall Diameter in Inches (in)
215 = Section Width in Millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect Ratio in Percent (%)
—Ratio of section height to section width of tire.
10.5 = Section Width in Inches (in)
R = Construction Code
—9R9 means Radial Construction.
—9D9 means Diagonal or Bias Construction.
15 = Rim Diameter in Inches (in)
296 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
—A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry.
H = Speed Symbol
—A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions.
—The maximum speed corresponding to the Speed Symbol should only be achieved un-
der specified operating conditions (i.e. tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits).
Load Identification:
(....blank....( = Absence of any text on sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) Tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra Load (or Reinforced) Tire
Light Load = Light Load Tire
C,D,E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum Load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry.
Maximum Pressure —
Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire.
STARTING AND OPERATING 297
5
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire;
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with
white sidewalls will have the full TIN including date code
located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the
TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted
on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side
then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT =
Department of Transportation
—This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards, and is approved for highway use.
MA =
Code representing the tire manufacturing location. (2 digits)
L9 =
Code representing the tire size. (2 digits)
ABCD =
Code used by tire manufacturer. (1 to 4 digits)
03 =
Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 =
Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits)
—01 means the year 2001.
—Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have 1 number to represent the year in
which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991.
298 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on either the face of the driver’s door or the driver’s side
“B” pillar.
Tire and Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) the total weight your vehicle can carry
3) the tire size designed for your vehicle
4) the cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear,
and spare tires.
Tire Placard Location
Tire and Loading Information
STARTING AND OPERATING 299
5
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” sec-
tion of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWR’s) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWR’s, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to the
“Vehicle Loading” section of this manual.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lbs.” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds” on
your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
sengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb.
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (since 5 x 150 = 750,
and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs.)
300 STARTING AND OPERATING
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE: The following table shows examples on how to
calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capaci-
ties of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE: For the following example, the combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs. (392
kg).
STARTING AND OPERATING 301
5
302 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
1. Safety—
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause accidents.
• Under inflation increases tire flexing and can result
in tire failure.
• Over inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause
damage that result in tire failure.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to
the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or
left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
STARTING AND OPERATING 303
5
2. Economy—
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under inflation, also increases
tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consump-
tion.
3. Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability—
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed either on
the face of the driver’s door or on the driver’s side “B”
pillar.
Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information for vehicle loads that are less than the
maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure con-
ditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information” section of this manual.
The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
Tire Placard Location
304 STARTING AND OPERATING
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under inflated.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap (if equipped). This
will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1 km) after a 3 hour period. The cold tire inflation
pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres-
sure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12 °F (7 °C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68 °F (20 °C) and the
outside temperature = 32 °F (0 °C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12 °F (7 °C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
STARTING AND OPERATING 305
5
Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious accident. Don’t drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75
mph (120 km/h).
Radial-Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four (or 6, in case
of trucks with dual rear wheels). Never combine
them with other types of tires.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
306 STARTING AND OPERATING
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with
radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-
stalled at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only.
With these tires, do not drive more than 50 mph (80
km/h). Temporary-use spare tires have limited tread
life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire/wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the
compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
result.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
on your vehicle. This tire is identified by a limited use
spare tire warning label located on the limited use spare
tire and wheel assembly. This tire may look like the
STARTING AND OPERATING 307
5
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same tire,
replace (or repair) the original tire and reinstall on the
vehicle at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
The limited use spare tires are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more
than 60 mph (100 km/h). Keep inflated to the cold tire
inflation pressure listed on either your tire placard or
limited use spare tire and wheel assembly. Replace
(or repair) the original tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
result in loss of vehicle control.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping when you are stuck.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in Section 6 of this
manual for additional information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30
mph (48 km/h) or for more than 30 seconds continu-
ously when you are stuck, and don’t let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
308 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 inch (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this
point.
Life of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including but not limited to:
•
Driving style
•
Tire pressure
•
Distance driven
STARTING AND OPERATING 309
5
WARNING!
Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six years,
regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow
this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You
could lose control and have an accident resulting in
serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed (refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
The service description and load identification will be
found on the original equipment tire. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend
that you contact your original equipment or an autho-
rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire
specifications or capability.
310 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combina-
tions of unapproved tires and wheels may change
suspension dimensions and performance charac-
teristics, resulting in changes to steering, han-
dling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause
unpredictable handling and stress to steering and
suspension components. You could lose control
and have an accident resulting in serious injury
or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with
load ratings approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have an accident.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer
readings.
Alignment And Balance
Poor suspension alignment may result in:
•
Fast tire wear.
•
Uneven tire wear, such as feathering and one-sided
wear.
•
Vehicle pull to right or left.
Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right.
Alignment will not correct this condition. See your dealer
for proper diagnosis.
STARTING AND OPERATING 311
5
Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration.
Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out-of-
balance. Proper balancing will reduce vibration and
avoid tire cupping and spotty wear.
TIRE CHAINS
Use only compact chains, or other traction aids that meet
SAE type “Class S” specifications. Chains must be the
proper size for the vehicle, as recommended by the chain
manufacturer.
NOTE: Do not use tire chains on a compact spare tire.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the following
precautions:
• Because of restricted chain clearance between tires and other
suspension components, it is important that only chains in
good condition are used. Broken chains can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that
could indicate chain breakage. Remove the damaged parts of
the chain before further use.
• Install chains on the front wheels as tightly as possible and
then retighten after driving about
1
⁄
2
mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 45 mph (70 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps,
especially with a loaded vehicle.
• If chains are used on an All Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicle, they
should be used on all four tires.
• Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pavement.
• Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions on the
method of installation, operating speed, and conditions for
use. Always use the lower suggested operating speed of the
chain manufacturer if different than the speed recommended
by the manufacture.
312 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: In order to avoid damage to tires, chains, and
your vehicle do not drive for a prolonged period of time
on dry pavement. Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s
instructions on method of installation, operating speed,
and conditions for usage.
Always use the lower suggested operating speed if both
the chain manufacturer and vehicle manufacture suggest
a maximum speed. This notice applies to all chain
traction devices, including link and cable (radial) chains.
SNOW TIRES
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during winter. Standard tires are of the all season type
and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M+S
designation on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of 4, failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120
km/h).
TIRE ROTATION
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates, and tend to develop irregular wear pat-
terns.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
STARTING AND OPERATING 313
5
Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your
type of driving found in the “Maintenance Schedules”
Section of this manual. More frequent rotation is permis-
sible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per-
formed.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward-cross”
shown in the following diagram.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure
based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure
(the placard is located on the drivers side B-pillar).
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1
psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for at least 3
hours or driven less than 1 mile (1 km) after a 3 hour
period, and in outside ambient temperature. Refer to the
“Tires – General Information” in this section for infor-
mation on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires.
The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven
- this is normal and there should be no adjustment for
this increased pressure.
314 STARTING AND OPERATING
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning
threshold for any reason, including low temperature
effects, or natural air pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warn-
ing has been illuminated, the tire pressure must be
increased to the recommended cold placard pressure in
order for the TPMS warning lamp to be turned off. The
system will automatically update and the TPMS warning
lamp will extinguish once the updated tire pressures
have been received. The vehicle may need to be driven
for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) to receive
this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than 3 hours) placard of 35 °F (241
kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68 °F (20 °C) and the
measured tire pressure is 30 psi (207 kPa), a temperature
drop to 20 °F (-7 °C) will decrease the tire pressure to
approximately 26 psi (179 kPa). This tire pressure is
sufficiently low enough to turn ON the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Light.” Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
pressure to rise to approximately 30 psi (207 kPa), but the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Light” will still be ON. In this
situation, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Light” will turn
OFF only after the tires have been inflated to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value.
STARTING AND OPERATING 315
5
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures have
been established for the tire size equipped on your
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equip-
ment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Do not
use aftermarket sealants or balance beads if your
vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the
sensors may result.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the TPMS sensor.
NOTE:
•
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
•
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
•
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.Under-
inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
316 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, using an accurate tire pressure
gage, even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS Telltale Lamp.
•
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
Basic TPMS without EVIC — If Equipped
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev-
els. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve
stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver
Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to check the
tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and too main-
tain the proper pressure.
The Basic TPMS consists of the following components:
•
Receiver Module
•
4 Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
•
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp
will illuminate in the instrument cluster and an
audible chime will be activated when one or
more of the four active road tire pressures are
low. Should this occur you should stop as soon as
possible, check the inflation pressure of each tire on your
vehicle, and inflate each tire to the manufacturer recom-
mended pressure, located on the tire pressure placard.
The system will automatically update and the TPMS
warning light will extinguish once the updated tire
pressure(s) have been received.
STARTING AND OPERATING 317
5
NOTE: The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10
minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) to receive this infor-
mation.
The TPMS Telltale Lamp will flash on and off for 75
seconds, and remain on solid when a system fault is
detected. The system fault will also sound a chime. If the
ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat, provid-
ing the system fault still exists. The TPMS Telltale Lamp
will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists. A
system fault can occur with any of the following sce-
narios:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS
sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Accumulation of excessive snow and/or ice around
the wheels or wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare
wheel and tire assembly that does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, it will not be monitored by
the TPMS. In the event that the compact spare tire is
swapped with a low pressure road tire, each ignition key
cycle will still show the TPMS Lamp to be ON, and a
chime to sound. Once you repair or replace the original
road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the
compact spare tire, the TPMS will update automatically,
and the TPMS Lamp will turn OFF as long as no tire
pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any
of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) for
the TPMS to receive this information.
318 STARTING AND OPERATING
Basic TPMS with EVIC — If Equipped
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev-
els. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve
stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver
Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to check the
tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and too main-
tain the proper pressure.
The Basic TPMS consists of the following components:
•
Receiver Module
•
4 Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
•
Various TPMS Messages, which display in the Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).
•
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp
The TPMS Telltale Lamp will illuminate in the instru-
ment cluster, and an audible chime will be activated
when one or more of the four active road tire pressures
are low. In addition, EVIC will display the number of
tire(s) that are low, followed by the “Tire Low Pressure”
text message. Should this occur, you should stop as soon
as possible, check the inflation pressure of each tire on
you vehicle, and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s recom-
mended cold placard pressure value. The system will
automatically update and the TPMS Lamp will extin-
guish one the updated tire pressures have been received.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes
above 15 mph (25 km/h) for the TPMS to receive this
information.
The TPMS Telltale Lamp will flash on and off for 75
seconds, and remain on solid when a system fault is
detected. The system fault will also sound a chime. In
addition, EVIC will display a “SERVICE TIRE SYSTEM
SOON” text message. If the ignition key is cycled, this
STARTING AND OPERATING 319
5
sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still
exists. The TPMS Telltale Lamp will turn off when the
fault condition no longer exists. A system fault can occur
with any of the following scenarios:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS
sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Accumulation of excessive snow and/or ice around
the wheels or wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare
wheel and tire assembly that does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, it will not be monitored by
the TPMS. In the event that the compact spare tire is
swapped with a low pressure road tire, each ignition key
cycle will still show the TPMS Lamp to be ON, a chime to
sound, and a “1 Tire Low Pressure” message to appear in
the EVIC. Once you repair or replace the original road
tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact
spare tire, the TPMS will update automatically, and the
TPMS Lamp will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is
below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four
active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for
up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) for the TPMS
to receive this information.
Premium TPMS – If Equipped
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev-
els. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve
stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver
Module.
320 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to check the
tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain
the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
•
Receiver Module
•
4 Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
•
3 Trigger Modules (mounted in three of the four wheel
wells)
•
Various TPMS Messages, which display in the Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), and a
graphic displaying tire pressures.
•
Yellow Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The TPMS Telltale Lamp will illuminate in the instru-
ment cluster, and an audible chime will be activated
when one or more of the four active road tire pressures
are low. The EVIC will show a graphic display of the
pressure value(s) with the low tire(s) flashing.
Low Tire Pressure Display
STARTING AND OPERATING 321
5
NOTE: Low pressure in the spare or compact tire
(which has no sensor and therefore not monitored) will
not cause the TPMS Telltale Lamp to illuminate or the
chime to sound.
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four
active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible,
and inflate the low tire(s) that is flashing on the graphic
display to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pres-
sure value. The system will automatically update, the
graphic display of the pressure value(s) will stop flash-
ing, and the TPMS Lamp will extinguish once the up-
dated tire pressure(s) have been received. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph
(25 km/h) for the TPMS to receive this information.
Service Tire System Soon
The TPMS Telltale Lamp will flash on and off for 75
seconds, and remain on solid when a system fault is
detected. The system fault will also sound a chime. In
addition, the EVIC will display a “SERVICE TIRE SYS-
TEM SOON” text message for 3 seconds. This text
message is then followed by “— —”, for the pressure
value(s) indicating which TPMS Sensor(s) is not being
received.
322 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists If the system fault
no longer exists, the TPMS Telltale Light will no longer
flash, the “SERVICE TIRE SYSTEM SOON” text mes-
sage will not be present, and a pressure value will be
displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can occur
with any of the following scenarios:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS
sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Accumulation of excessive snow and/or ice around
the wheels or wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
Check TPM System Display
STARTING AND OPERATING 323
5
NOTE:
•
Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare wheel
and tire assembly that does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, it will not be monitored
by the TPMS. In the event that compact spare tire is
swapped with a low pressure road tire, each ignition
key cycle will still show the TPMS Lamp to be ON, a
chime to sound, and the EVIC will still show the low
tire pressure value flashing on the graphic display.
Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare
tire, the TPMS will update automatically. The TPMS
Lamp will turn OFF, as long as no tire pressure is
below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the
four active road tires. In addition, the graphic display
in the EVIC will update with a new pressure value.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes
above 15 mph (25 km/h) for the TPMS to receive this
information.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
following licenses:
United States .....................KR5S120123
Canada ........................2671-S120123
324 STARTING AND OPERATING
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
3.8L GASOLINE ENGINES
The 3.8L engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide excel-
lent fuel economy and performance when
using high quality unleaded “regular”
gasoline having an octane rating of 87. The
use of premium gasoline is not recom-
mended. Under normal conditions, the use of premium
gasoline will not provide a benefit over high quality
regular gasolines, and in some circumstances may result
in poorer performance.
4.0L GASOLINE ENGINES
The 4.0L engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide satisfac-
tory fuel economy and performance when
using high quality unleaded gasoline having an octane
range of 87 to 89. The manufacturer recommends the use
of 89 octane for optimum performance. The use of
premium gasoline is not recommended. Under normal
conditions, the use of premium gasoline will not provide
a benefit over high quality regular and mid-grade gaso-
lines, and in some circumstances may result in poorer
performance.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consid-
ering service for the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 325
5
Over 40 automobile manufacturers around the world
have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifica-
tions (the World Wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) to define
fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions,
engine performance, and durability for your vehicle. The
manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet
the WWFC specifications if they are available.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates, and are spe-
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
prove air quality.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso-
lines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro-
vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygen-
ates are required in some areas of the country during the
winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
your vehicle.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol or E85
Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting
and driveability problems and may damage critical
fuel system components.
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline or E85
Ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufac-
turer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol, it
does not have the negative effects of Methanol.
326 STARTING AND OPERATING
MMT In Gasoline
MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emission system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
or not his/her gasoline contains MMT.
It is even more important to look for gasolines without
MMT in Canada, because MMT can be used at levels
higher than those allowed in the United States.
MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformu-
lated gasolines.
Materials Added to Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives are not needed under
normal conditions and would result in additional cost.
Therefore you should not have to add anything to the
fuel.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
•
The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance,
damage the emission control system.
STARTING AND OPERATING 327
5
•
An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact your dealer for service assistance.
•
The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as
octane enhancers is not recommended. Most of these
products contain high concentrations of methanol.
Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems
resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not
the responsibility of the manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
•
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which can kill.
Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is
stopped in an open area with the engine running for
more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system
to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
328 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte-
nance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time
the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
•
Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to
prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous ex-
haust gases from entering the vehicle.
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
As a reminder, a fuel icon with an arrow
indicating which side of the vehicle the fuel
filler door is located on, is located in the
instrument cluster, just below the Fuel Gage.
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the
left side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged,
be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the fuel system or emission control sys-
tem could result from using an improper fuel tank
filler tube cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let
impurities into the fuel system and may cause the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) to turn on due to
fuel vapors escaping from the system.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
NOTE: When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the
fuel tank is full.
STARTING AND OPERATING 329
5
WARNING!
•
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank filled.
•
Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regula-
tions and may cause the malfunction indicator
light to turn on.
•
Failure to follow the above may result in serious
injury or even death.
NOTE:
•
Tighten the fuel filler cap until you hear a “clicking”
sound. This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is
properly tightened.
•
If the gas cap is not tighten properly, the Malfunction
Indicator Light may come on. Be sure the gas cap is
tightened every time the vehicle is refueled.
WARNING!
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on the
ground while filling.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
•
If the gASCAP message is displayed in the instrument
cluster, this signifies a leak or change in the evapora-
tive system is detected. Sometimes this is the result of
a loosely fitting (or possibly damaged) filler cap.
330 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the
odometer reset button to turn the gASCAP message
off.
•
Make sure that the fuel filler cap is tightened each time
the vehicle is refueled.
•
If the problem continues, the message will appear the
next time the vehicle is started. See your authorized
dealer service center as soon as possible. See Section 7
of this manual for more information.
VEHICLE LOADING
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown in the
charts that follow. This information should be used for
passenger and luggage loading as indicated.
If the seatbacks are folded for carrying cargo, do not
exceed the specified GVWR and GAWR.
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a certification label attached to the rear
of the driver’s door.
The label contains the following information:
•
Name of manufacturer
•
Month and year of manufacture
•
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
•
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
•
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
•
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
•
Type of Vehicle
•
Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
STARTING AND OPERATING 331
5
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
GVWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
WARNING!
Because the front wheels drive and steer the vehicle,
it is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Overloading
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and front
and rear GAWR.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to insure that it
is not over the GVWR.
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
evenly over the front and rear axles.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
GVWR.
332 STARTING AND OPERATING
Loading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle by axle and side by side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
A loaded vehicle is shown in the illustration. Note that
neither the GVWR or the GAWR capacities have been
exceeded.
STARTING AND OPERATING 333
5
Example Only Front Axle Rear Axle
Empty Weight 2538 lbs
(1151 kg)
2076 lbs
(942 kg )
Load (Including driver,
passengers and cargo)
223 lbs
(101 kg)
890 lbs (404
kg)
Total 2762 lbs
(1253 kg)
2968 lbs
(1346 kg)
GAWR 2826 lbs
(1282 kg)
3035 lbs
(1377 kg)
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer carefully re-
view this information to tow your load as efficiently and
safely as possible.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning ve-
hicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The gross trailer weight (GTW) is the weight of the trailer
plus the weight of all cargo, consumables and equipment
(permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its
9loaded and ready for operation9 condition. The recom-
mended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded
trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer
must be supported by the scale.
334 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The gross combination weight rating (GCWR) is the total
permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when
weighed in combination. (Note that GCWR ratings in-
clude a 150 lbs (68 kg) allowance for the presence of a
driver).
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the
trailer. In most cases it should not be less than 10% or
more than 15% of the trailer load. You must consider this
as part of the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The maximum height and maximum width of the front of
a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
STARTING AND OPERATING 335
5
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kind of
hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they’re commonly used to tow small- and medium-sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying lever-
age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads, to distribute trailer tongue weight to
the tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When
used in accordance with the manufacturers’ directions, it
provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction / hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on Vehicle
and Trailer configuration / loading to comply with gross
axle weight rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking per-
formance, and could result in an accident.
Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible
with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
Vehicle dealer for additional information.
336 STARTING AND OPERATING
Weight Distributing Hitch System Improper Adjustment of Weight Distributing System
STARTING AND OPERATING 337
5
Trailer Hitch Classification
Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of
trailers weighing over 2,000 lbs (907 kg) with the optional
Trailer Tow Prep Package. See your dealer for package
content.
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) chart for the Max. GTW towable for your
given drivetrain.
Trailer Hitch Classification
Class Max. GTW
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium
Duty
3,500 lbs (1587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2268 kg)
Class IV - Extra
Heavy Duty
10,000 lbs (4540 kg)
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer
weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
338 STARTING AND OPERATING
3.8L & 4.0L Automatic with Engine Oil Cooler
Engine/Transmission
GCWR (Gross Com-
bined Wt. Rating)
Frontal Area
Max. GTW (Gross
Trailer Wt.)
Max. Tongue Wt.
3.8L & 4.0L Auto-
matic with Engine
Oil Cooler
8,600 lbs (3 900 kg) 40 SQ. FT.
Up to 2 persons &
Luggage 3,500 lbs
(1 600 kg)
350 lbs (158 kg)
8,600 lbs (3 900 kg) 40 SQ. FT.
3 to 4 persons &
Luggage 3,000 lbs
(1 360 kg)
300 lbs (136 kg)
8,600 lbs (3 900 kg) 40 SQ. FT.
5 to 6 persons &
Luggage 1,000 lbs
(454 kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as
part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire
and Loading Information placard. Refer to the Tire–
Safety Information Section in this manual.
STARTING AND OPERATING 339
5
3.8L & 4.0L Automatic WITHOUT Engine Oil Cooler
Engine/Transmission
GCWR (Gross Com-
bined Wt. Rating)
Frontal Area
Max. GTW (Gross
Trailer Wt.)
Max. Tongue Wt.
3.8L & 4.0L Auto-
matic WITHOUT
Engine Oil Cooler
7,700 lbs (3 492 kg) 40 SQ. FT.
Up to 2 persons &
Luggage 2,600 lbs
(1 179 kg)
260 lbs (117 kg)
7,700 lbs (3 492 kg) 40 SQ. FT.
3 to 4 persons &
Luggage 2,100 lbs
(952 kg)
210 lbs (95 kg)
N/A N/A
5 to 6 persons &
Luggage NOT Rec-
ommended
N/A
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: Your vehicle must be equipped with a trailer
tow package (trailer hitch and engine oil cooler) in order
to tow a gross trailer weight of 3,500 lbs (1 600 kg).
340 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer and Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer accidents.
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
•
The tongue weight of the trailer.
•
The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
•
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
STARTING AND OPERATING 341
5
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or dealer-installed options,
must be considered as part of the total load on your
vehicle. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information plac-
ard in the Tire Safety Information Section of this manual
for the maximum combined weight of occupants and
cargo for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle driv-
etrain components the following guidelines are recom-
mended:
CAUTION!
•
Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles (805
km) of vehicle operation. Doing so may damage
your vehicle.
•
During the first 500 miles (805 km) of trailer
towing, limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h).
Perform the maintenance listed in Section 8 of this
manual. When towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR,
or GCWR, ratings.
342 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to an injury accident.
Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing
as safe as possible:
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have an accident.
•
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not over-
load your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a
loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes,
axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chas-
sis structure or tires.
•
Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
•
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade.
When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow
vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in
P for Park. Always, block or 9chock9 the trailer wheels.
•
GCWR must not be exceeded.
•
Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
STARTING AND OPERATING 343
5
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized
(This requirement may limit the ability to always
achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue weight as a
percentage of total trailer weight).
Towing Requirements — Tires
−
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
−
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to the
Tires–General Information section of this manual on
Tire Pressures for proper tire inflation procedures.
−
Also, check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
−
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to the Tires–General
Information section of this manual on Tread Wear
Indicators for the proper inspection procedure.
−
When replacing tires refer to the Tires–General Infor-
mation section of this manual on Replacement Tires for
proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires
with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase
the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
−
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
−
An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
344 STARTING AND OPERATING
−
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000
lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000
lbs (907 kg).
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hy-
draulic brake lines. It can overload your brake sys-
tem and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
when you need them and could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis-
tance. When towing you should allow for additional
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights & Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
STARTING AND OPERATING 345
5
The Trailer Tow Package may includea4and7pin
wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness
and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
4 - Pin Connector
346 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy
traffic.
Towing Tips — Automatic Transmission
The “D” range can be selected when towing. However, if
frequent shifting occurs while in this range, the “3” range
should be selected.
NOTE: Using the “3” range while operating the vehicle
under heavy operating conditions will improve perfor-
mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces-
sive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be
changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than
45 minutes of continuous operation. See Maintaining
Your Vehicle in Section 7 Maintenance Schedule in Sec-
tion 8 of this manual for transmission fluid change
information and intervals.
NOTE: Check the automatic transmission fluid level
before towing.
7- Pin Connector
STARTING AND OPERATING 347
5
Towing Tips — Electronic Speed Control (If
Equipped)
−
Don’t use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
−
When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
−
Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
Towing Tips — Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
heating, take the following actions:
−
City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, put transmission
in neutral but do not increase engine idle speed.
−
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
−
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
−
refer to Cooling System Operating information in the
Maintenance section of this manual for more informa-
tion.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER
VEHICLE (Flat towing with all four wheels on the
ground)
Recreational towing for this vehicle is not recommended.
NOTE: If the vehicle requires towing make sure all four
wheels are off the ground.
348 STARTING AND OPERATING
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
m Hazard Warning Flasher ..................350
m If Your Engine Overheats .................351
m Jacking And Tire Changing ................352
▫ Jack Location ........................352
▫ Spare Tire Stowage ....................354
▫ Preparations For Jacking ................355
▫ Jacking Instructions ....................356
m Jump-Starting Procedure ..................360
m Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ..................362
m Towing A Disabled Vehicle ................363
▫ With Ignition Key .....................363
▫ Without The Ignition Key ...............365
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
(Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The
Ground) ............................365
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
With A Tow Dolly .....................365
6
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
The hazard flasher switch is located in the center of
the instrument panel above the center air outlets.
To engage the Hazard Warning Flashers, depress the
switch on the instrument panel. When the Hazard Warn-
ing Switch is activated, all directional turn signals will
flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emer-
gency. Push the switch a second time to turn off the
flashers.
CAUTION!
This is an emergency warning system and should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when
your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety
hazard for other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition switch is OFF.
Hazard Flasher Switch
350 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning Flash-
ers may wear down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac-
tion.
•
On the highways — Slow down.
•
In city traffic — While stopped, put transmission in
neutral, but do not increase engine idle speed.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition. If your air conditioner
is on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to
the engine cooling system and turning off the A/C
removes this heat. You can also turn the Temperature
control to maximum heat, the Mode control to floor, and
the fan control to High. This allows the heater core to act
as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”, pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
“H”, turn the engine off immediately, and call for
service.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 351
6
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, see Section 7, Maintenance, of this
manual. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
Jack Location
Five Passenger Seating
The jack and jack-handle are stowed in the rear storage
bin located behind the second row bench seat. Pull up on
the storage bin cover to access the jack and jack tools.
Remove the scissors jack and jack handle by rotating the
small wing nut to the left.
Jack Location
352 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Six Passenger Seating
The jack and jack-handle are stowed in the rear storage
bin located in the rear cargo floor. Pull up on the storage
bin cover and liner to access the jack and jack tools.
Jack Wing Nut
Jack Location
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 353
6
Spare Tire Stowage
Five Passenger Seating
The spare tire is stowed under the rear of the vehicle by
means of a cable winch mechanism. To remove or stow
the spare, use the jack handle to rotate the “spare tire
drive” nut. The nut is located under the plastic cover at
the center rear of the cargo floor area, just inside the
liftgate opening.
Six Passenger Seating
The spare tire is stowed under the rear of the vehicle by
means of a cable winch mechanism. To remove or stow
the spare, use the jack handle to rotate the “spare tire
drive” nut. The nut is located under the trim cover at the
center of the rear storage bin in the rear cargo floor.
Spare Tire Removal
Fit the jack-handle over the drive nut. Rotate the nut to
the left until the spare is on the ground with enough slack
cable to allow you to pull the tire out from under the
vehicle.
Lowering Spare Tire
354 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
jack handle only. Use of an air wrench or other power
tools is not recommended and can damage the winch.
When the spare is clear, tilt the retainer at the end of the
cable and pull it through the center of the wheel.
Preparations For Jacking
Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, avoid ice or
slippery areas, set the parking brake and place the gear
selector in PARK. Turn OFF the ignition.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
•
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher.
•
Block both the front and rear
of the wheel diagonally oppo-
site the jacking position. For
example, if changing the right
front tire, block the left rear
wheel.
•
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the
vehicle is being jacked.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 355
6
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
•
Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you.
You could be crushed. Never get any part of your
body under a vehicle that is on a jack. Never start
or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
•
The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should
be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help pre-
vent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the edge
of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be
raised.
• Apply the parking brake firmly before jacking.
• Never start the engine with the vehicle on a jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful of
motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated are securely
stowed, spares must be stowed with the value stem
facing the ground.
356 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
1. Remove the spare wheel, scissors jack and jack-handle
from stowage.
2. Carefully pry off the wheel center cap if equipped,
using the tip of the jack handle.
3. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still
on the ground.
NOTE: Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do
not substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts.
4. There are two jack engagement locations on each side
of the body — refer to the following illustration.
5. These locations are on the sill flange on the underside
of the body. The jack is to be located, engaging the
flanges, 20 cm (8 inches) inward from the edge of the
wheel opening closest to the wheel to be changed. Place
the wrench on the jack screw and turn to the right until
the jack head is properly engaged in the described
Jack Engagement Locations
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 357
6
location. Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the
jack is securely engaged. Never jack up the vehicle
using any suspension components.
6. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right,
using the swivel wrench. Raise the vehicle only until the
tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is
obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift
provides maximum stability.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
7. Remove the wheel lug nuts, for vehicles with wheel
covers, remove the cover from the wheel by hand. Do not
pry the wheel cover off. Then pull the wheel off the hub.
8. Install the spare wheel, for vehicles with wheel covers,
align the notch in the wheel cover with the valve stem on
the wheel. Install the cover on the wheel by hand only
and install the wheel lug nuts with the cone shaped end
of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not
tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been
lowered.
NOTE: Do not install the wheel cover on the compact
spare.
Do not use a hammer or force to install the wheel covers.
9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left.
10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while tightening for increased leverage. Alternate
358 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
lug nuts until each nut has been tightened twice. Correct
wheel nut tightness is 130 N·m (95 ft. lbs). If in doubt
about the correct tightness, have them checked with a
torque wrench by your dealer or at a service station.
11. Lower the jack to its fully closed position.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack, thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
NOTE: The full size flat tire will not store under the
vehicle. It should be repaired /or replaced, and rein-
stalled on the vehicle as soon as possible.
12. Secure the spare tire as follows:
•
Turn the wheel so that the valve-stem is down. Slide
the wheel retainer through the center of the wheel
and position it properly across the wheel opening.
•
For convenience in checking the spare tire inflation,
stow with the valve-stem toward the rear of the
vehicle.
•
Using the jack-handle, rotate the drive nut to the
right until the wheel is drawn into place against the
underside of the vehicle.
•
Continue to rotate the nut until you hear the mecha-
nism click three times. It cannot be overtightened.
Push against the tire several times to be sure it is
securely in place.
13. Stow the jack and jack handle.
14. Check the tire pressure as soon as possible. Correct
pressure as required.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 359
6
NOTE: When reinstalling the wheel center cap, insure
that the valve stem symbol on the back of the cap is
pointed toward the wheel valve stem. Install the center
cap using hand pressure only. Do not use a hammer.
Wheel Nuts
All wheel nuts should be tightened occasionally to elimi-
nate the possibility of wheel studs being sheared or the
bolt holes in the wheels becoming elongated. This is
especially important during the first few hundred miles
of operation, and after each time a tire is changed, to
allow the wheel nuts to become properly set. All nuts
should first be firmly seated against the wheel. The nuts
should then be tightened to recommended torque.
Tighten the nuts to final torque in increments. Progress
around the bolt circle, tightening the nut opposite to the
nut just previously tightened until final torque is
achieved. Recommended torque is 130 N·m (95 ft. lbs).
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURE
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started.
Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot
be started this way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic
converter and once the engine has started, ignite and
damage the converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a
discharged battery, booster cables may be used to obtain a
start from another vehicle. This type of start can be danger-
ous if done improperly, so follow this procedure carefully.
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not allow
battery fluid to contact eyes, skin or clothing. Don’t lean
over battery when attaching clamps or allow the clamps to
touch each other. If acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush
contaminated area immediately with large quantities of
water.
• A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flammable and
explosive. Keep flame or spark away from the vent holes.
Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source
with an output that exceeds 12 volts.
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the
hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition switch is on.
You can be hurt by the fan.
360 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
When jump starting, proceed as follows:
1. Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry
such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an
inadvertent electrical contact.
2. When boost is provided by a battery in another
vehicle, park that vehicle within booster cable reach and
without letting the vehicles touch. Set the parking brake,
place the automatic transmission in PARK and turn the
ignition switch to the OFF position for both vehicles.
3. Turn off the heater, radio and all unnecessary electrical
loads.
4. Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive
terminal of the discharged battery. Connect the other end
of the same cable to the positive terminal of the booster
battery.
WARNING!
Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
5. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminal
of the booster battery and then to the engine of the
vehicle with the discharged battery. Make sure you have
a good contact on the engine.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 361
6
WARNING!
Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the
discharge battery. The resulting electrical spark could
cause the battery to explode.
During cold weather when temperatures are below
freezing point, electrolyte in a discharged battery
may freeze. Do not attempt jump starting because the
battery could rupture or explode. The battery tem-
perature must be brought up above freezing point
before attempting jump start.
6. Start the engine in the vehicle which has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, then start the
engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
7. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the above
sequence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan.
WARNING!
Any procedure other than above could result in:
1. Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting out
the battery vent;
2. Personal injury or property damage due to battery
explosion;
3. Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or
of immobilized vehicle.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between Reverse
362 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
and Drive. Usually the least accelerator pedal pressure to
maintain the rocking motion without spinning the
wheels is most effective.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 35
mph (55 km/h) when you are stuck. And don’t let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It
can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 35 mph (55 km/h).
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
With Ignition Key
Front Wheel Drive
Your vehicle may be towed under the following condi-
tions: The gear selector must be in NEUTRAL, the
distance to be traveled must not exceed 100 miles (160
km), the towing speed must not exceed 44 mph (72
km/h), and both front and rear wheels must be on the
ground. Exceeding these towing limits may cause a
transmission geartrain failure. If the transmission is not
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 363
6
operative, or if the vehicle is to be towed more than 100
miles (160 km), the vehicle must be towed with the front
wheels off the ground.
All Wheel Drive
Your vehicle may be towed under the following condi-
tions: The gear selector must be in NEUTRAL, the
distance to be traveled must not exceed 100 miles (160
km), the towing speed must not exceed 44 mph (72
km/h), and both front and rear wheels must be on the
ground. If your vehicle must be towed farther or at a
higher rate of speed, it must be transported on a flat bed
truck.
All Transmissions
CAUTION!
•
Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the front
with sling type towing equipment. Damage to the
front fascia will result.
•
Always use wheel lift equipment when towing
from the front. The only other approved method of
towing is with a flat bed truck.
•
Do not tow the vehicle from the rear. Damage to
the rear sheet metal, liftgate and fascia will occur.
•
Do not push or tow this vehicle with another
vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans-
mission may result.
364 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
If it is necessary to use the accessories while being towed
(wipers, defrosters, etc.), the key must be in the ON
position, not the ACCESSORY position. Make certain the
transmission remains in NEUTRAL.
Without The Ignition Key
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the LOCK position. The only ap-
proved method of towing with out the ignition key is
with a flat bed truck. Proper towing equipment is neces-
sary to prevent damage to the vehicle.
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER
VEHICLE (Flat towing with all four wheels on the
ground)
Flat towing of vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission, is only permitted within the limitations
described in this section.
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER
VEHICLE WITH A TOW DOLLY
The manufacturer does not recommend that you tow an
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) or front wheel drive vehicle on a
tow dolly. Vehicle damage may occur.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 365
6
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
m 3.8L Engines ..........................370
m 4.0L Engines ..........................371
m Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II ........372
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ............373
m Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs ............................373
m Replacement Parts ......................375
m Dealer Service .........................375
m Maintenance Procedures ..................376
▫ Engine Oil ..........................376
▫ Engine Oil Filter ......................379
▫ Drive Belt ...........................379
▫ Spark Plugs .........................379
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter ................380
▫ Catalytic Converter ....................380
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery ................382
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance .............383
▫ Power Steering — Fluid Check ............385
7
▫ Front & Rear Suspension Ball Joints ........385
▫ Steering Shaft Seal ....................385
▫ Steering Linkage ......................386
▫ Drive Shaft Universal Joints ..............386
▫ Body Lubrication .....................386
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades ................387
▫ Windshield And Rear Window Washers .....387
▫ Exhaust System ......................388
▫ Cooling System .......................389
▫ Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses .......394
▫ Brakes .............................394
▫ Master Cylinder — Brake Fluid Level Check . .396
▫ Fuel System Hoses ....................397
▫ Automatic Transmission ................398
▫ All Wheel Drive (AWD) — If Equipped .....400
▫ Front And Rear Wheel Bearings ...........401
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion ...........................401
▫ Cleaning The Center Console Cup Holders . . .406
m Fuses (Integrated Power Module) ...........407
m Vehicle Storage ........................410
m Replacement Light Bulbs .................411
m Bulb Replacement ......................412
▫ Headlights ..........................412
▫ High Intensity Discharge Headlights (HID) —
If Equipped .........................413
368 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Front Park/Turn Signal And Sidemarker
Lights .............................413
▫ Front Fog Light ......................414
▫ Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, Side Marker And
Back-Up Lights .......................415
▫ License Light ........................415
m Fluids And Capacities ...................416
m Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts ........417
▫ Engine .............................417
▫ Chassis ............................418
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 369
7
3.8L ENGINES
Engine Compartment 3.8L Engines
370 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
4.0L ENGINES
Engine Compartment 4.0L Engine
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 371
7
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-
sions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light.” It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your dealer for service as soon as
possible.
CAUTION!
•
Prolonged driving with the “Malfunction Indica-
tor Light” on could cause further damage to the
emission control system. It could also affect fuel
economy and driveability. The vehicle must be
serviced before any emissions tests can be per-
formed.
•
If the “Malfunction Indicator Light” is flashing
while the engine is running, severe catalytic con-
verter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
372 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
Should the “Loose Fuel Filler Cap” or “gASCAP” mes-
sage appear, there may be a problem in the evaporative
system. Before taking the vehicle into a qualified Dealer-
ship Service center, check first to see if the fuel filler cap
is possibly loose, improperly installed, or damaged. A
loose fuel filler cap message will be displayed in the
instrument cluster. Tighten the gas cap until a 9clicking9
sound is heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is
properly tightened. Press the odometer reset button to
turn the message off. If the problem persists, the message
will appear the next time the vehicle is started. If the
problem is detected twice in a row, the system will turn
on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). Resolving the
problem will turn the MIL light off. Take your vehicle in
to a qualified Dealership Service center.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states, which have an I/M (Inspection and
Maintenance) requirement, this check verifies the
following: the MIL (Malfunction Indicator Light)
is functioning and is not on when the engine is running,
and that the OBD (On Board Diagnostic) system is ready
for testing.
Normally, the OBD system will be ready. The OBD
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, if you recently had a dead battery, or a battery
replacement. If the OBD system should be determined
not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 373
7
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD system is ready, you must do
the following:
1. Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch.
2. Turn the ignition to the ON position, but do not crank
or start the engine.
3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
4. As soon as you turn your key to the ON position, you
will see your MIL symbol come on as part of a normal
bulb check.
5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn off the
ignition key or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD system is not ready and you should not
proceed to the I/M station.
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn off the ignition key or start
the engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD system
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD system is
ready or not ready, if the MIL symbol is illuminated
during normal vehicle operation, you should have your
374 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M
station can fail your vehicle because the MIL symbol is on
with the engine running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine Mopart parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to in-
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-Mopart parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
warranty.
DEALER SERVICE
Your dealer has the qualified service personnel, special
tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in
an expert manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your vehicle.
Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure
yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 375
7
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed
maintenance intervals, there are other items that should
operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance.
However, if a malfunction of these items does occur, it
could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance.
These items should be inspected if a malfunction is
observed or suspected.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.
The best time to check the engine oil level is about 5
minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not
check oil level before starting the engine after it has sat
overnight. Checking engine oil level when the engine is
cold will give you an incorrect reading.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the
dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at
the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these
engines.
376 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 of this
manual for information on this system.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 months,
whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API certified and meet
the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard
MS-6395.
Engine Oil Dipstick
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 377
7
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 4.0 Liter
Engines
SAE 10W-30 engine oil is preferred for all operating
temperatures. The engine oil filler cap also shows the
recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle.
Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 3.8 Liter
Engines
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your engine oil filler
cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for
your vehicle.
For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to
the Engine Compartment illustration in this section.
Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Materials Added to Engine Oil
The manufacture strongly recommends against the addi-
tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and
it’s performance may be impaired by supplemental ad-
ditives.
Disposing of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your dealer, service station, or
governmental agency for advice on how and where used
oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine
oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacture’s engines have a full-flow type oil filter.
Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of
replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality
filters should be used to assure most efficient service.
Mopar Engine Oil Filters are a high quality oil filter and
are recommended.
Drive Belt
At the mileage indicated in section 8: “Maintenance
Schedule”, replace the drive belt with a new drive belt.
NOTE: The belt must be routed correctly to ensure
proper drive function.
Spark Plugs
Spark plugs must fire properly to assure engine perfor-
mance and emission control. New plugs should be in-
stalled at the specified mileage. The entire set should be
replaced if there is any malfunction due to a faulty spark
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 379
7
plug. Malfunctioning spark plugs can damage the cata-
lytic converter. For proper type of replacement spark
plugs, refer to the “Vehicle Emission Control Informa-
tion” label in the engine compartment.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 of this
manual for engine air cleaner filter maintenance inter-
vals.
NOTE: Be sure to follow the “dusty or off-road condi-
tions” maintenance interval if applicable.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Catalytic Converter
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel
only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the
catalyst as an emission control device.
380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
CAUTION!
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-
ued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and the
vehicle.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
WARNING!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be grass
or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system.
Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your
exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may indicate severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, the
vehicle should be stopped, the engine shut off and the
vehicle allowed to cool. Thereafter, service, including a
tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be ob-
tained immediately.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 381
7
To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:
•
Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
•
Do not try to start engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
•
Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idling or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Maintenance-Free Battery
The top of the MAINTENANCE-FREE battery is perma-
nently sealed. You will never have to add water, nor is
periodic maintenance required.
WARNING!
•
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Don’t allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin or clothing. Don’t lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
diately with large amounts of water.
•
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Don’t use a
booster battery or any other booster source with an
output greater than 12 volts. Don’t allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
•
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
•
It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked posi-
tive (+) and negative (-) and identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
•
If a “fast charger” is used while battery is in
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an Authorized Dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a system
performance check. Drive belt tension should also be
checked at this time.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383
7
WARNING!
•
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Section 3 of the Warranty Information book for
further warranty information.
•
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced repairman.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocar-
bon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Pro-
tection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by dealers or other service facilities
using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C System
Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compres-
sor Oil, or Refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter
The filter access door is located under the instrument
panel on the passenger side. To replace the filter slide the
lock toward the rear of the vehicle (unlock position).
Remove the access door and pull the filter downward.
When installing a new filter, ensure its proper orienta-
tion. Align the black arrow on the bottom of the filter
frame with the direction of airflow (away from the
blower motor and towards the center of the car).
384 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” section of this
manual for the recommended air conditioning filter
replacement intervals.
Power Steering — Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through a certified
DaimlerChrysler Dealership.9
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to insure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturers recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts
for correct fluid type.
Front & Rear Suspension Ball Joints
The suspension ball joints are permanently sealed. No
regular maintenance is required for these components.
Steering Shaft Seal
The steering shaft seal, at the point where the shaft passes
through the bulkhead, is lubricated when it is installed. If
the seal becomes noisy when the steering shaft is turned,
it should be lubricated with a multi-purpose grease.
Mopar multi-purpose lubricant is recommended.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 385
7
Steering Linkage
The tie rod end ball joints are permanently lubricated and
do not require periodic maintenance.
Drive Shaft Universal Joints
Your vehicle has constant velocity universal joints. Peri-
odic lubrication of these joints is not required. However,
the joint boots should be inspected for external leakage or
damage when other maintenance is performed. If leakage
or damage is evident, the universal joint boot and grease
should be replaced immediately.
Continued operation could result in failure of the univer-
sal joint due to water and dirt contamination of the
grease. This would require complete replacement of the
joint assembly.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, doors, liftgate and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically to assure quiet, easy operation
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the appli-
cation of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be
wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching compo-
nents to insure proper function. When performing other
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the fall and spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopart Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Windshield Wiper Blades
The rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield
should be cleaned periodically with a sponge or soft cloth
and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accu-
mulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
Windshield and Rear Window Washers
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
rear window washer is shared. It is located in the engine
compartment and should be checked for fluid level at
regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield
washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the
system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water.
The washer fluid reservoir will hold a full gallon of fluid
when the Low Washer Fluid Light illuminates.
Washer Fluid Reservoir
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 387
7
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer
to “Exhaust Gas” in the Safety Tips section of this
manual.
388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System
WARNING!
•
When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-
connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
•
You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant
or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear
steam coming from under the hood, don’t open the
hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never
try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the
radiator is hot.
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance, the
system should be drained, flushed and refilled with fresh
coolant. Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub-
ber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
coolant from the radiator drain cock. If the cap is sealing
properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 389
7
drain from the coolant recovery bottle. DO NOT RE-
MOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE
COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush and Refill
At the intervals shown on the Maintenance Schedules,
the system should be drained, flushed and refilled.
If the solution is dirty or contains a considerable amount
of sediment, clean and flush with a reliable cooling
system cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove
all deposits and chemicals. Properly dispose of old
antifreeze solution.
Selection Of Engine Coolant
Use only the manufacturers recommended coolant, refer
to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct
coolant type.
CAUTION!
Mixing of coolants other than specified HOAT en-
gine coolants, may result in engine damage and may
decrease corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT coolant
is introduced into the cooling system in an emer-
gency, it should be replaced with the specified cool-
ant as soon as possible.
Do not use plain water alone or alcohol base engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol based coolants. Use of Propylene
Glycol based coolants is not recommended.
390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Adding Engine Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant that allows extended maintenance intervals. This
coolant can be used up to 5 Years or 100,000 miles before
replacement. To prevent reducing this extended mainte-
nance period, it is important that you use the same
coolant throughout the life of your vehicle. Please review
these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Addi-
tive Technology (HOAT) coolant.
When adding coolant, a minimum solution of 50% rec-
ommended Mopar Antifreeze/ Coolant 5 Year / 100,000
Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technol-
ogy), or equivalent, in water should be used. Use higher
concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
234°F (237°C ) are anticipated.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water/engine coolant solution.
The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of
corrosion protection in the engine cooling system.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
NOTE: Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of the
engine coolant and will require more frequent coolant
changes.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
coolant, and to insure that coolant will return to the
radiator from the coolant recovery bottle.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 391
7
WARNING!
•
The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre-
caution. Never add coolant when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to
cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to
build up in the cooling system. To prevent scald-
ing or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while
the system is hot or under pressure.
•
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-
gine damage may result.
Disposal of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant is a regulated
substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your
local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children
do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open
containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the
ground. If ingested by a child, contact a physician
immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.
Engine Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine off and cold, the coolant level in the coolant
recovery bottle should be between the ranges indicated
on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
coolant freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your
service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating
temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only
be checked once a month.
392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
When additional coolant is needed to maintain the
proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do
not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles (a
few kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor
coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is
normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot coolant to
enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
•
Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
•
Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant recovery bottle. If antifreeze needs to be
added, contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be
protected against freezing.
•
If frequent coolant additions are required, or if the
level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when
the engine cools, the cooling system should be pres-
sure tested for leaks.
•
Maintain coolant concentration at 50% HOAT engine
coolant (minimum) and distilled water for proper
corrosion protection of your engine which contains
aluminum components.
•
Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
•
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean, also.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 393
7
•
Do not change the thermostat for summer or winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory coolant performance, poor gas
mileage, and increased emissions.
Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses
Inspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence
of heat and mechanical damage. Hard or soft spots,
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and exces-
sive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber.
Pay particular attention to those hoses nearest to high
heat sources such as the exhaust manifold. Inspect hose
routing to be sure hoses do not come in contact with any
heat source or moving component which may cause heat
damage or mechanical wear.
Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or
collapsed.
Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and cou-
plings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are
present.
Components should be replaced immediately if there is
any evidence of wear or damage that could cause failure.
Brakes
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Suggested service intervals can be found in the Mainte-
nance Schedules.
394 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You wouldn’t have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Brake And Power Steering Hoses
When the vehicle is serviced for scheduled maintenance,
inspect surface of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of
heat and mechanical damage. Hard and brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, abrasion, and excessive swelling
indicate deterioration of the rubber. Particular attention
should be made to examining those hose surfaces nearest
to high heat sources, such as the exhaust manifold.
Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or
collapsed.
Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and cou-
plings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are
present.
NOTE: Often, fluid such as oil, power steering fluid,
and brake fluid are used during assembly plant opera-
tions to facilitate the assembly of hoses to couplings.
Therefore, oil wetness at the hose-coupling area is not
necessarily an indication of leakage. Actual dripping of
hot fluid when systems are under pressure (during
vehicle operation), should be noted before a hose is
replaced based on leakage.
NOTE: Inspection of brake hoses should be performed
whenever the brake system is serviced and at every
engine oil change. Inspect hydraulic brake hoses for
surface cracking, scuffing, or worn spots. If there is any
evidence of cracking, scuffing, or worn spots, the hose
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 395
7
should be replaced immediately! Eventual deterioration
of the hose can take place resulting in a possibility of a
burst failure.
WARNING!
Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure.
You could have an accident. If you see any signs of
cracking, scuffing, or worn spots, have the brake
hoses replaced immediately.
Master Cylinder — Brake Fluid Level Check
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
when performing underhood services, or immediately if
the brake system warning light indicates system failure.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the
“FULL” mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the require-
ments described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturers recommended brake fluid, refer
to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid
type.
396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the
brake fluid catching fire.
•
Use of brake fluid that may have a lower initial
boiling point or unidentified as to specification,
may result in sudden brake failure during hard
prolonged braking. You could have an accident.
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture.
CAUTION!
Do not allow petroleum base fluid to contaminate the
brake fluid, all brake seal components could be
damaged causing partial or complete brake failure.
Fuel System Hoses
Electronic Fuel Injection high pressure fuel systems are
designed with hoses and quick connect fittings which
have unique material characteristics to provide adequate
sealing and resist attack by deteriorated gasoline.
You are urged to use only the manufacture specified
hoses with quick connect fittings, or their equivalent in
material and specification, in any fuel system servicing. It
is mandatory to replace any damaged hoses or quick
connect fittings that have been removed during service.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397
7
Care should be taken in installing quick connect fittings
to insure they are properly installed and fully connected.
See your authorized dealer for service.
Automatic Transmission
The automatic transmission and differential assembly are
contained within a single housing.
All automatic transmissions are equipped with a conven-
tional filler tube and dipstick. If fluid is added, it should
be added through the dipstick hole in the case.
The dipstick is located just behind the radiator, lower
right side.
Selection of Lubricant
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the
transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor-
mance. Use only manufacturers recommended transmis-
sion fluid, refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
for correct fluid type. It is important that the transmission
fluid be maintained at the prescribed level using the
recommended fluid.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
turers recommended fluid may cause deterioration in
transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturers recommended fluid will result in
more frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct
fluid type.
398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Procedure For Checking Fluid Level
The fluid level in the automatic transmission should be
checked whenever the vehicle is serviced. Operation with
an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the
transmission and of the fluid.
To properly check the automatic transmission fluid level,
the following procedure must be used:
1. The vehicle must be on level ground.
2. The engine should be running at curb idle speed for a
minimum of 60 seconds.
3. Fully apply parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector momentarily in each gear
position ending with the lever in P (PARK). Wipe the area
around the dipstick clean to eliminate the possibility of
dirt entering the transmission.
5. Remove the dipstick and determine if the fluid is hot
or warm. Hot fluid is approximately 180°F (82°C), which
is the normal operating temperature after the vehicle has
been driven at least 15 miles (24 km). The fluid cannot be
comfortably held between the finger tips. Cold is when
the fluid is below 80°F (27°C).
6. Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert until seated.
Remove dipstick and note reading.
a. If the fluid is hot, the reading should be in the
crosshatched area marked “HOT” (between the upper
two holes in the dipstick).
b. If the fluid is cold, the fluid level should be between
the lower two holes in the area marked “COLD”.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 399
7
If the fluid level indicates low, add sufficient fluid to
bring to the proper level.
CAUTION!
Do not overfill. Dirt and water in the transmission
can cause serious damage. To prevent dirt and water
from entering the transmission after checking or
replenishing fluid, make certain that the dipstick cap
is reseated properly.
Fluid and Filter Changes
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 of this
manual for the recommended transaxle fluid and filter
change intervals.
If the transaxle is disassembled for any reason, the fluid
and filter should be changed.
NOTE: Refer to Section 8 of this manual for Mainte-
nance Schedules.
If the transmission is disassembled for any reason, the
fluid and filter should be changed.
Special Additives
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supple-
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi-
tives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes to aid
All Wheel Drive (AWD) — If Equipped
Under normal operating conditions, periodic fluid level
checks and lubricant changes for the Power Transfer Unit
and Rear Carrier, are not required. However when the
vehicle is serviced for other reasons, the exterior surface
of these components should be inspected for evidence of
fluid leaks. Confirmed leaks should be repaired as soon
as possible.
400 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Power Transfer Unit
The fill plug is located on the side of the power transfer
unit housing. The fluid should be maintained at a level
even with the bottom of the fill plug hole when the
vehicle is parked on a level surface. If it becomes neces-
sary to add or replace the fluid, use only the manufac-
turers recommended fluid, refer to Fluids, Lubricants
and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type.
Rear Carrier
The fill plug is located on the side of the rear carrier
housing. The fluid should be maintained at a level even
with the bottom of the fill plug hole when the vehicle is
parked on a level surface. if it becomes necessary to add
or replace the fluid, use only the manufacturers recom-
mended fluid, refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine
Parts for correct fluid type.
Fluid Changes
Refer to Section 8 of this manual for Maintenance Sched-
ules for fluid change intervals.
Front And Rear Wheel Bearings
Front and rear wheel bearings are permanently sealed.
No regular maintenance is required for these compo-
nents.
Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion
Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 401
7
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-
body protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
•
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
•
Stone and gravel impact.
•
Insects, tree sap and tar.
•
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
•
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
•
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using Mopar Car Wash or a mild car
wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear
water.
•
If insects, tar or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and
Tar Remover to remove.
•
Use Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains
and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to
scratch the paint.
•
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
402 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such
as steel wool or scouring powder, which will scratch
metal and painted surfaces.
Special Care
•
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
•
It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and
open.
•
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
•
If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
similar cause which destroys the paint and protective
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos-
sible. The cost of such repairs is considered the respon-
sibility of the owner.
•
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
•
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
•
Use Mopar touch up paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your dealer has touch up paint to match the
color of your vehicle.
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a
mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 403
7
heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use Mopart
Wheel Cleaner (05066247AB) or equivalent or select a
nonabrasive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring
pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Only
Mopart or equivalent is recommended. Do not use oven
cleaner. Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels’
protective finish.
Interior Care
Cleaning Interior Trim
Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
cloth, a damp cloth with Mopar Total Clean, then Mopar
Spot & Stain Remover if absolutely necessary. Do not use
harsh cleaners or Armorall. Use Mopar Total Clean to
clean vinyl upholstery.
Cleaning Leather Upholstery
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and Mopar Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-
gents, or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
404 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
YES Essentialst Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If
Equipped
YES Essentialst seats may be cleaned in the following
manner:
•
Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
•
Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
•
For tough stains, apply Mopart Total Clean or a mild
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain.
Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
•
For grease stains, apply Mopart Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
•
Do not use any solvents or protectants on Yes Essen-
tialst products.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with Mopar Glass Cleaner or any commercial household-
type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner.
Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window
equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter
window equipped with the radio antenna. Do not use
scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch
the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 405
7
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. Amild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.
2. Dry with a soft tissue.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to
wash them.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
Cleaning The Center Console Cup Holders
Removal
Grab the center of the rubber portion of the cupholder
and lift upward.
Cleaning
Soak the rubber cupholder liner in a mixture of medium
hot tap water and one teaspoon of mild liquid dish soap.
Let soak for approximately one hour. After one hour pull
the liner from the water and dip it back into the water
about six times. This will loosen any remaining debris.
Rinse the liner thoroughly under warm running water.
Shake the excess water from the liner and dry the outer
surfaces with a clean soft cloth.
Installation
Align the liner in the cupholder and press down firmly.
406 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FUSES (INTEGRATED POWER MODULE)
An Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the
engine compartment near the battery. This center con-
tains maxi fuses, mini fuses and relays. A label that
identifies each component is printed on the inside of the
cover.
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Description
1 40 Amp
Green
Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) Pump
2 Spare
3 30 Amp
Pink
Ignition Off Draw (IOD)
4 40 Amp
Green
Body Control Module
(BCM) Feed 1
5 40 Amp
Green
Electronic Back Light (EBL)
6 30 Amp
Pink
Front Wipers
7 40 Amp
Green
Starter
8 40 Amp
Green
Power Seat C/B
Integrated Power Module (IPM)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 407
7
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Description
9 40 Amp
Green
Power Sunroof
10 Spare
11 40 Amp
Green
Headlight Washer, Power
Liftgate
12 Spare
13 40 Amp
Green
Radiator Fan 1
14 Spare
15 40 Amp
Green
Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) Module
40 40 Amp
Green
Driver Door Node
41 40 Amp
Green
Passenger Door Node
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Description
42 40 Amp
Green
Front Blower
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
24 20 Amp Yel-
low
Power Outlet (Selectable)
25 15 Amp Blue Radio, Amplifier, Naviga-
tion, Hands-Free Phone
(HFM), Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC),
EC, SNRF, Mirror
26 20 Amp Yel-
low
Power Outlet
27 Spare
28 25 Amp
Natural
Horn
408 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
29 20 Amp Yel-
low
Cluster, CHMSL, Stop
Lights, Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS)
30 10 Amp Red Ignition Switch
31 20 Amp Yel-
low
Hazard
34 Spare
35 Spare
36 20 Amp Yel-
low
Electronic Automatic
Transaxle (EATX) Solenoid
37 25 Amp
Natural
ASD
38 20 Amp Yel-
low
Fuel Pump
39 20 Amp Yel-
low
A/C Clutch, MTV
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
44 25 Amp
Natural
Rear Heated Seats
45 10 Amp Red Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) Ignition Run
46 20 Amp Yel-
low
Passenger Door
47 20 Amp Yel-
low
Driver Door
48 15 Amp Blue PLG, OHC, Body Control
Module (BCM), Naviga-
tion, Hands-Free Phone
(HFM)
49 25 Amp
Natural
Amplifier
50 15 Amp Blue HVAC, DVD, RAD, CLK,
SKREEM
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 409
7
CAUTION!
•
When installing the Integrated Power Module
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is prop-
erly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so
may allow water to get into the Integrated Power
Module, and possibly result in a electrical system
failure.
•
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated
may result in a dangerous electrical system over-
load. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be
corrected.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
days you may want to take steps to protect your battery.
You may:
•
Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
•
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
insure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
410 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS
LIGHT BULBS — Interior Bulb Number
Center & Rear Reading Lights ...............578
Front Door Courtesy Light ..................578
Liftgate Light(s)..........................578
Overhead Console Reading Lights ...........212–2
Visor Vanity Lights.....................V26377
NOTE: For lighted switches, see your dealer for replace-
ment instructions.
All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass
cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved
and should not be used for replacement.
LIGHT BULBS — Exterior Bulb Number
Back-up ...............................921
Rear Stop, Turn Signal ....................3157
Rear Sidemarker.......................194NA
Fog Light .............................9145
Front Turn Signal ....................3457NAK
Front Sidemarker ......................194NA
Standard Headlight ......................H13
License................................168
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 411
7
BULB REPLACEMENT
Headlights
1. Open hood, disconnect and isolate the battery nega-
tive cable.
2. Remove the two screws securing the headlight mod-
ule to the vehicle and gently pull the headlight module
forward away from the vehicle, disengaging the assem-
bly from the lower attachment clip.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Remove the rubber boot seal.
5. Rotate the bulb to the left and replace the bulb.
Reinstall the rubber boot seal and then the headlight
module.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
412 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
High Intensity Discharge Headlights (HID) — If
Equipped
The headlights are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlight switch off and the key removed. Because of
this, you should not attempt to service a headlight bulb
yourself. If a headlight bulb fails, take your vehicle to
an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A transient high tension occurs at the bulb sockets of
High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlights when the
headlight switch is turned ON. It may cause serious
electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced prop-
erly. See your authorized dealer for service.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with High Intensity Dis-
charge Headlights (HID), when the headlights are turned
on there is a blue hue to the lights. This diminishes and
becomes more white after approximately 10 seconds, as
the system charges.
Front Park/Turn Signal and Sidemarker Lights
1. Open hood, disconnect and isolate the battery nega-
tive cable.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 413
7
2. Remove the two screws securing the headlight mod-
ule to the vehicle and pull the headlight module forward
away from the vehicle, disengaging the assembly from
the lower attachment clip.
3. Twist the bulb socket to remove from the headlight
module and pull the bulb from socket.
4. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket and then reinstall
the headlight module.
Front Fog Light
1. Reach under the front fascia and grasp the front fog
light bulb.
2. Twist the front fog light bulb to remove from the fog
light module.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the
bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
414 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, Side Marker and
Back-up Lights
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Remove the two tail light assembly screws and rotate
the assembly outward to remove the ball stud form the
attaching grommet.
3. Twist the socket assembly to remove it from the
housing.
4. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
5. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket, and reattach the
tail light assembly.
License Light
1. Place a screwdriver in the slot next to the release tab
and push on the release tab to remove the lens.
2. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Replace the bulb and
push on the lens until it snaps into place.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 415
7
FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel All Engines 23 gallons 87 liters
Engine Oil-With Filter
4.0 Liter Engines (SAE 10W-30, API Certified) 5.5 qts 5.2 liters
3.8 Liter Engines (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 5.0 qts 4.7 liters
Cooling System *
4.0 Liter Engines (Mopart Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equiva-
lent)
10.7 qts 10.1 liters
3.8 Liter Engines (Mopart Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equiva-
lent)
11.8 qts 11.2 liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
416 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
Engine Coolant Mopart Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Or-
ganic Additive Technology) or equivalent
3.8 Liter Engine Oil Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 engine oil. Refer to your oil filler cap for cor-
rect SAE grade, meeting DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
4.0 Liter Engine Oil Use API Certified SAE 10W-30 engine oil, refer to oil viscosity chart for cor-
rect SAE grade meeting DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
Oil Filter, 3.8L & 4.0L Engines Mopart 5281090 or equivalent. Refer to your oil filler cap for correct SAE
grade.
Spark Plugs 3.8L & 4.0L Engines ZFR5LP-13G (Gap.050 in / 1.27 mm
Fuel Selection 3.8L 87 Octane
Fuel Selection 4.0L 89 Octane
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 417
7
Chassis
Component Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
Automatic Transmission Mopart ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
AWD Power Transfer Unit Mopart Gear Lubricant 75W-90 or equivalent.
AWD Rear Carrier Mopart Gear Lubricant 75W-90 or equivalent.
Brake Master Cylinder Mopart DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used or equivalent. If DOT 3
brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recom-
mended brake fluids.
Power Steering Reservoir MopartPower Steering Fluid +4 or MopartATF +4 Automatic Transmis-
sion Fluid.
418 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The “Scheduled” maintenance services, listed in bold
type must be done at the times or mileages specified to
assure the continued proper functioning of the emission
control system. These, and all other maintenance services
included in this manual, should be done to provide best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent main-
tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip
driving.
Inspection and service also should be done any time a
malfunction is suspected.
NOTE: Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emis-
sion control devices and systems on your vehicle may be
performed by any automotive repair establishment or
individual using any automotive part, which has been
certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or, in the State of Califor-
nia, California Air Resources Board regulations.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles “Oil Change Required” will be dis-
played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles “Change Oil” will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime
will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
Based on engine operation conditions the oil change
indicator message will illuminate, this means that service
is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced
as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
420 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
NOTE:
•
The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicles oil
if it has been 6 months since your last oil change even
if the oil change indicator message is NOT illumi-
nated.
•
Change your engine oil more often if you drive your
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
•
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or 6 months, whichever
comes first.
Your dealer will reset the oil change indicator message
after completing the scheduled oil change. If this sched-
uled oil change is performed by someone other than your
dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps
described under “Oil Change Required” in “Use Factory
Settings” of the EVIC section in this manual or under
“Odometer/Trip Odometer” in the “Instrument Cluster
Descriptions section of this manual.
At Each Stop for Fuel
•
Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully
warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level while
the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accu-
racy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when the
level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
•
Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
Once a Month
•
Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
•
Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals
as required.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 421
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
•
Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, power steering and transmission and
add as needed.
•
Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
operation.
At Each Oil Change
•
Change the engine oil filter.
•
Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
422 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Required Maintenance Intervals
Perform Maintenance Every (Where time and mileage
are listed, follow the interval that occurs first.)
Maintenance Items Miles Kilometers or Months
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. 6,000 10 000 6
Rotate Tires. 6,000 10 000 6
If using your vehicle for dusty or off-road conditions,
inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace if neces-
sary.
12,000 20 000 12
Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary. 12,000 20 000 12
Replace the air conditioning filter. 12,000 20 000 12
Inspect the CV Joints. Perform the first inspection at
12,000 miles (20 000 km) or 12 months.
24,000 40 000 24
Inspect Exhaust System. Perform the first inspection at
12,000 miles (20 000 km) or 12 months.
24,000 40 000 24
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot
seals, replace if necessary.
24,000 40 000 24
Replace the engine air cleaner filter. 30,000 50 000 30
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 423
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Perform Maintenance Every (Where time and mileage
are listed, follow the interval that occurs first.)
Maintenance Items Miles Kilometers or Months
Change Rear Drive Assembly (RDA) fluid. 60,000 100 000 60
Change Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid. 60,000 100 000 60
Change the automatic transmission fluid & filter if
using your vehicle for any of the following: police,
taxi, fleet or frequent trailer towing.
60,000 100 000 60
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. 90,000 150 000 90
Flush and replace the engine coolant. 102,000 170 000 60
Replace the ignition cables on 3.3L and 3.8L engines. 102,000 170 000 102
Replace the spark plugs on 3.8L, 4.0L engines. 102,000 170 000 102
Replace the timing belt on 4.0L engine. 102,000 170 000 102
Change the automatic transmission fluid & filter. 120,000 200 000 120
Replace Accessory Drive Belt(s). 120,000 200 000 120
424 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 425
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
m Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
Vehicle ..............................428
▫ Prepare For The Appointment ............428
▫ Prepare A List ........................428
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests .............428
m If You Need Assistance ...................428
m Warranty Information (U.S. Vehicles Only) .....431
m Mopart Parts .........................431
m Reporting Safety Defects ..................431
▫ In Canada ..........................432
m Publication Order Forms ..................432
m Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire
Quality Grades ........................434
▫ Treadwear ..........................434
▫ Traction Grades ......................434
▫ Temperature Grades ...................435
9
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty, discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident,
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items, and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a
minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable
to make these arrangements when you call for an ap-
pointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its dealers are vitally interested in
your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our
products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized
Chrysler, Dodge, or Jeep dealer. We strongly recommend
that you take your vehicle to your selling dealer. They
know you and your vehicle best, and are most concerned
that you get prompt and high quality service. The
manufacturer’s dealers have the facilities, factory-trained
428 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
technicians, special tools, and the latest information to
assure your vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely
manner.
This is why you should always talk to your dealer’s
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
this process.
•
If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the dealership. They
want to know if you need assistance.
•
If your dealership is unable to resolve the concern, you
may contact the Manufacturer’s Customer Center.
Any communication to the Manufacturer’s Customer
Center should include the following information:
•
Owner’s name and address
•
Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
•
Dealership name
•
Vehicle identification number
•
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 992-1997
DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465–2001
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico (915) 729–1248 or 729–1240
Outside Mexico (525) 729–1248 or 729–1240
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 429
9
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its Customer
Center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for your
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unex-
pected repairs after your manufacturer’s new vehicle
limited warranty expires. The manufacturer stands be-
hind only the manufacturer’s Service Contracts. If you
purchased a manufacturer’s Service Contract, you will
receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card
in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery
date. If you have any questions about your service
contract, call the manufacturer’s Service Contract Na-
tional Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922.
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s Service Contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s Service Contract. If you purchased a
service contract that is not a manufacturer’s Service
Contract, and you require service after your manufactur-
er’s new vehicle limited warranty expires, please refer to
your contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased your new vehicle. Your dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
your ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
430 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition,
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain prod-
ucts of component wear contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only)
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and
provisions of DaimlerChrysler’s warranties applicable to
this vehicle.
MOPART PARTS
Mopart fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from your dealer. They will help you keep your
vehicle operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In the 50 United States and Washington D.C.: If you
believe that your vehicle has a defect, which could cause
a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administra-
tion (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer, and the
manufacturer.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 431
9
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Wash-
ington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information
about motor vehicle safety from http://
www.safercar.gov.
In Canada:
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should write to
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B
3V9.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals. (No P.O. Boxes).
•
Service Manuals.
These comprehensive service manuals provide the
information that students and professional technicians
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
maintaining, servicing, and repairing DaimlerChrysler
Corporation vehicles. A complete working knowledge
of the vehicle, system, and/or components is written
in straightforward language with illustrations, dia-
grams, and charts.
432 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
•
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals.
Filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations,
these practical manuals make it easy for students and
technicians to find and fix problems on computer-
controlled vehicle systems and features. They show
exactly how to find and correct problems the first time,
using step-by-step troubleshooting and driveability
procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list
of all tools and equipment.
•
Owner’s Manuals.
These manuals have been prepared with the assistance
of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you
with specific Chrysler group vehicles. Included are
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance pro-
cedures as well as specifications, capabilities and
safety tips.
Call Toll Free at:
•
1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
•
1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the World Wide Web at:
•
www.techauthority.daimlerchrysler.com
•
www.daimlerchrysler.ca/manuals
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 433
9
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following describes the tire grading categories estab-
lished by the National highway Traffic Safety Adminis-
tration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s
manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall
of the tires on your car.
All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal Safety
Requirements in Addition to These Grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled con-
ditions on a specified government test course. For ex-
ample, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1
1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
434 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 435
9
INDEX
10
Adding Fuel ...........................329
Adding Washer Fluid ..................142,387
Additives, Fuel .........................327
Adjustable Pedals .......................159
Air Conditioner Maintenance ...............383
Air Conditioning .....................251,256
Air Conditioning Controls .................251
Air Conditioning Filter .................269,384
Air Conditioning Refrigerant ...............383
Air Conditioning System ..........251,256,259,383
Air Conditioning System, Zone Control ........252
Air Pressure, Tires .......................304
Airbag ................................50
Airbag Deployment .......................62
Airbag Light ...................54,55,64,79,197
Airbag Maintenance .......................64
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) ...............51
Alarm (Security Alarm) ....................18
Alignment and Balance ....................311
All Wheel Drive (AWD) ................284,400
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle .............7
Antenna, Satellite Radio ...................248
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...........390,391,416
Disposal ............................392
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ............153,288
Anti-Lock Warning Light ..................188
Anti-Theft System ........................18
Appearance Care ........................401
Auto Down Power Windows ................32
Auto Up Power Windows ..................33
Automatic Dimming Mirror .................86
Automatic Door Locks ...................27,28
Automatic Headlights ....................137
Automatic Oil Change Indicator ..........192,202
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) .........259
Automatic Transaxle ....................12,278
Adding Fluid .........................418
Interlock System .....................15,280
438 INDEX
Reset Mode ..........................280
Selection Of Lubricant ................398,418
Shifting .............................281
Special Additives ......................400
Automatic Transmission ................398,400
Adding Fluid ......................399,400
Fluid and Filter Changes .................400
Fluid Change .........................400
Fluid Level Check ......................399
Fluid Type ...........................398
Autostick ........................145,281,282
Ball Joints .............................385
Battery ...............................382
Gas Caution ..........................382
Jump Starting .........................360
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) .......24
Bearings ..............................401
Belts, Drive ............................379
Body Mechanism Lubrication ...............386
B-Pillar Location ........................299
Brake Assist System ......................154
Brake Control System, Electronic .............154
Brake, Parking ..........................285
Brake System ........................287,394
Anti-Lock (ABS) ....................153,288
Fluid Check .......................396,418
Hoses ..............................395
Warning Light ........................189
Brakes .............................287,394
Brake/Transmission Interlock ...............279
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle ........77
Bulb Replacement .......................412
Bulbs, Light ............................411
Calibration, Compass .....................207
Camera, Rear ...........................166
Capacities, Fluid ........................416
INDEX 439
10
Caps, Filler
Fuel ................................329
Oil (Engine) ..........................378
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ...............391
Car Washes ............................402
Carbon Monoxide Warning .................328
Cargo Area Cover .......................176
Cargo Compartment
Luggage Carrier .......................178
Cargo Tie-Downs ........................177
Catalytic Converter ......................380
Caution, Exhaust Gas ...................78,388
CD (Compact Disc) Changer ..........218,228,232
CD (Compact Disc) Player ......212,216,222,226,232
CD (Compact Disc) Player Maintenance ........250
Cellular Phone ........................89,250
Chains, Tire ............................312
Changing A Flat Tire .....................352
Chart, Tire Sizing ........................296
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator
Light) .............................193,373
Child Restraint ........................67,69
Child Restraint Tether Anchors .............71,74
Child Safety Locks ........................30
Child Seat ..............................75
Clean Air Gasoline .......................326
Cleaning
Wheels .............................403
Climate Control .........................250
Clock ................................209
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance .............250
Compact Spare Tire ......................307
Compass ..............................207
Compass Calibration .....................207
Compass Variance .......................207
Computer, Trip/Travel ....................208
Console ..............................175
Console, Floor ..........................175
440 INDEX
Console, Overhead .......................168
Contract, Service ........................430
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ..........391
Cooling System .........................389
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ..............391
Coolant Capacity ......................416
Coolant Level ......................389,392
Disposal of Used Coolant ................392
Drain, Flush, and Refill ..................390
Inspection ...........................392
Points to Remember ....................393
Pressure Cap .........................391
Radiator Cap .........................391
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) ......390,416,417
Cruise Control (Speed Control) ..............144
Cruise Light ...........................193
Cup Holder .........................174,406
Customer Assistance .....................428
Data Recorder, Event ......................65
Dealer Service ..........................375
Defroster, Rear Window ...................269
Defroster, Windshield ................79,256,265
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers .................141
Diagnostic System, Onboard ................372
Digital Video Disc (DVD) Player .............232
Dimmer Switch, Headlight .................139
Dipsticks
Automatic Transmission .................399
Oil (Engine) ..........................376
Disabled Vehicle Towing ...................363
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...............392
Engine Oil ...........................379
Door Ajar Light .........................197
Door Locks .............................26
Door Locks, Automatic ....................27
Door Opener, Garage .....................146
INDEX 441
10
Drive Belts ............................379
Drive Shaft Universal Joints ................386
Driving
On Slippery Surfaces ....................291
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing
Water ..............................292
DVD Player (Video Entertainment System) ......232
Electric Remote Mirrors ....................88
Electrical Power Outlets ...................172
Electronic Brake Control System .............154
Brake Assist System ....................154
Electronic Stability Program ...............155
Traction Control System .................154
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ......144
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) ............155
Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) .............................166,199
Emergency, In Case of
Hazard Warning Flasher .................350
Jacking .............................352
Jump Starting .........................360
Overheating ..........................351
Emission Control System Maintenance ......373,420
Engine ..........................77,370,371
Air Cleaner ..........................380
Air Cleaner Filter ......................380
Block Heater .........................278
Break-In Recommendations ................77
Checking Oil Level .....................376
Compartment ......................370,371
Coolant (Antifreeze) ....................417
Cooling .............................389
Exhaust Gas Caution ..................37,328
Flooded, Starting ......................277
Fuel Requirements ..................325,416
Oil ...........................376,416,417
442 INDEX
Oil Change Interval ...............192,202,377
Oil Disposal ..........................379
Oil Filler Cap .........................378
Oil Filter Disposal ......................379
Oil Selection .......................377,416
Oil Synthetic .........................378
Operation ............................77
Overheating ..........................351
Temperature Gauge .....................187
Event Data Recorder ......................65
Exhaust Gas Caution ..............37,78,328,388
Exhaust System .........................388
Extender, Seat Belt ........................49
Exterior Folding Mirrors ...................87
Fabric Care .........................404,405
Filters
Air Cleaner ..........................380
Air Conditioning ....................269,384
Automatic Transaxle ....................400
Engine Oil ........................379,417
Engine Oil Disposal ....................379
Flashers
Hazard Warning .......................350
Turn Signal ..................139,188,413,415
Flooded Engine Starting ...................277
Floor Console ..........................175
Fluid Capacities .........................416
Fluid Leaks .............................80
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission .................399
Brake ............................396,418
Power Steering .....................385,418
Fluids ................................417
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts ..........417
Fog Light Service ........................414
Fog Lights .......................138,194,414
Folding Rear Seat ........................126
INDEX 443
10
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ...................362
Fuel .................................325
Adding .............................329
Additives ............................327
Clean Air ............................326
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ....................329
Gasoline ............................325
Gauge ..............................188
Hoses ..............................397
Octane Rating ......................325,417
Requirements ......................325,416
Tank Capacity ........................416
Fuel System Caution .....................327
Fueling ...............................329
Fuses ................................407
Garage Door Opener (HomeLinkt) ...........146
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ............329,330,373
Gasoline, Clean Air ......................326
Gasoline (Fuel) .........................325
Gasoline, Reformulated ...................326
Gauges
Coolant Temperature ....................187
Fuel ................................188
Odometer ...........................191
Speedometer .........................188
Tachometer ..........................191
Gearshift ..............................281
General Information ...............18,25,114,324
Glass Cleaning ..........................405
Grocery Bag Retainer .....................128
Gross Axle Weight Rating ...............332,335
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating .............332,334
Hands-Free Phone (UConnect™) ..............89
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water ........................292
444 INDEX
Hazard Warning Flasher ...................350
Head Phones ...........................241
Head Restraints .........................117
Headlights ............................413
Bulb Replacement ......................412
High Beam ...........................139
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ........139
Passing .............................139
Replacing ............................412
Switch ..............................136
Time Delay ..........................138
Heated Seats ...........................118
Heater ...............................251
Heater, Engine Block .....................278
Hitches
Trailer Towing ........................338
Holder, Cup ...........................174
HomeLinkt (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . . 146
Hood Release ..........................133
Hoses .............................394,397
Ignition ...............................12
Key.................................12
Ignition Key Removal .....................12
Illuminated Entry ........................20
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ...................15
Indicator, Traction Control .................190
Infant Restraint ........................68,69
Information Center, Vehicle .................199
Instrument Cluster .................185,186,187
Instrument Panel and Controls ..............184
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning .............405
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) ............407
Interior Appearance Care ..................404
Interior Lights .......................135,136
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ...........141
Introduction .............................4
INDEX 445
10
Jack Location ...........................352
Jack Operation .......................352,356
Jacking Instructions ......................356
Jump Starting ..........................360
Key, Programming ........................17
Key, Replacement ........................16
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) ...................15
Key-In Reminder .........................14
Keyless Entry System ......................20
Keys .................................12
Knee Bolster ............................55
Lane Change and Turn Signals ..............139
Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................39
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for
CHildren) ............................71,74
Latches
Hood ...............................133
Lead Free Gasoline ......................325
Life of Tires ............................309
Liftgate ................................34
Lights ..............................80,134
Airbag ........................54,64,79,197
Anti-Lock ...........................188
Automatic Headlights ...................137
Back-Up .............................415
Brake Warning ........................189
Bulb Replacement ...................411,412
Courtesy/Reading .....................134
Cruise ..............................193
Daytime Running ......................138
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ...............136
Door Ajar ...........................197
Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
Indicator ...........................156,158
Engine Temperature Warning ..............197
Fog ..........................138,194,414
446 INDEX
Hazard Warning Flasher .................350
Headlight Switch ......................136
Headlights .....................136,412,413
High Beam Indicator ....................193
Illuminated Entry .......................20
Instrument Cluster .....................136
Interior .............................136
License .............................415
Liftgate Ajar ..........................197
Lights On Reminder ....................138
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ........193
Oil Pressure ..........................194
Park ...............................413
Reading .............................168
Rear Servicing ........................415
Rear Tail ............................415
Seat Belt Reminder .....................194
Service ...........................411,412
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . 193
Side Marker ..........................415
Traction Control .......................156
Turn Signal ..................136,139,413,415
Voltage .............................187
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) .....187
Washer Fluid .........................197
Load Leveling System ....................180
Loading Vehicle ......................331,333
Capacities ...........................333
Tires ...............................299
Locks
Door ................................26
Steering Wheel .........................14
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
(LATCH) ............................71,74
Lubrication, Body .......................386
Luggage Rack (Roof Rack) .................178
Maintenance, Airbag ......................64
INDEX 447
10
Maintenance Free Battery ..................382
Maintenance Procedures ...................376
Maintenance Schedule ....................420
Maintenance, Sunroof .....................172
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 193,373
Manual, Service .........................432
Map/Reading Lights .....................168
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) .............129
Memory Seat .........................89,129
Mini-Trip Computer ......................208
Mirrors ................................86
Automatic Dimming .....................86
Electric Remote ........................88
Exterior Folding ........................87
Heated ..............................89
Memory .............................129
Outside ..............................87
Rearview .............................86
Vanity ...............................89
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle .............7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ...............314
Mopar Parts .........................375,431
Multi-Function Control Lever ...............136
Navigation System ....................166,244
New Vehicle Break-In Period ................77
Occupant Restraints .......................38
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ..............325
Odometer .............................191
Trip ................................191
Oil Change Indicator ..................192,202
Oil Change Indicator, Reset ..............192,202
Oil, Engine .........................376,417
Capacity ............................416
Change Interval ..................192,202,377
Checking ............................376
Disposal ............................379
448 INDEX
Filter ............................379,417
Filter Disposal ........................379
Identification Logo .....................378
Materials Added to .....................379
Recommendation ...................377,416
Synthetic ............................378
Viscosity ..........................378,416
Onboard Diagnostic System ..............372,373
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLinkt) ...........146
Overdrive .............................281
Overhead Console .......................168
Overhead Travel Information Center ..........168
Overheating, Engine ...................187,351
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) ..........432
Panic Alarm ............................24
Park Sense System, Rear ...................160
Parking Brake ..........................285
Parking On Hill .........................285
Passing Light ...........................139
Pedals, Adjustable .......................159
Pets, Transporting ........................77
Phone, Cellular ..........................89
Phone, Hands-Free (UConnect™) .............89
Placard, Tire and Loading Information .........299
Power
Brakes ..............................287
Distribution Center (Fuses) ...............407
Door Locks ...........................27
Lift Gate .............................35
Mirrors ..............................88
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ..........172
Seats ............................115,116
Steering .............................290
Steering, Checking .....................385
Sunroof .............................169
Windows .............................32
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts ............48,49
INDEX 449
10
Preparation for Jacking ....................355
Pretensioners
Seat Belts .............................47
Programmable Electronic Features .........147,203
Programming Transmitters (Remote Keyless
Entry) ..............................24,147
Radial Ply Tires .........................306
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) .......390,391
Radio Broadcast Signals ...................210
Radio Operation ........................250
Radio Remote Controls .................235,249
Radio, Satellite ..........................245
Radio (Sound Systems) .................212,222
Rear Camera ...........................166
Rear Liftgate ............................34
Rear Park Sense System ...................160
Rear Seating Flexibility ....................126
Rear Window Defroster ...................269
Rear Window Features ....................141
Rear Wiper/Washer ......................141
Rearview Mirrors ........................86
Reclining Front Seats .....................120
Recorder, Event Data ......................65
Recreational Towing ...................348,365
Reminder, Seat Belt .......................47
Remote Control .........................235
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) .................20
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls ........249
Replacement Keys ........................16
Replacement Parts .......................375
Replacement Tires .......................310
Reporting Safety Defects ...................431
Resetting Oil Change Indicator ...........192,202
Restraint, Head .........................117
Restraints, Child .......................67,75
Restraints, Infant .........................68
Retractable Cargo Area Cover ...............176
450 INDEX
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck ................362
Roof Rack (Luggage Rack) .................178
Rotation, Tires ..........................313
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle .................79
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ...............80
Safety Defects, Reporting ..................431
Safety, Exhaust Gas .......................37
Safety Information, Tire ...................294
Safety Tips .............................78
Satellite Radio ..........................245
Satellite Radio Antenna ...................248
Schedule, Maintenance ....................420
Seat Belt Maintenance ....................406
Seat Belt Reminder .......................47
Seat Belts ............................38,39
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ..................44
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ........44
And Pregnant Women .................48,49
Child Restraint .......................67,69
Extender .............................49
Front Seat ............................39
Pretensioners ..........................47
Rear Seat .............................39
Reminder ............................194
Untwisting Procedure ....................45
Seats .................................115
Adjustment ..........................121
Cleaning ............................405
Easy Entry ........................123,132
Heated ..............................118
Memory .............................129
Power ...........................115,116
Reclining ............................120
Tilting ..............................123
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ................18
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) ..........390,417
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ...................15
INDEX 451
10
Sentry Key Programming ...................17
Service Assistance .......................428
Service Contract .........................430
Service Engine Soon Light (Malfunction
Indicator) .............................193
Service Manuals ........................432
Setting the Clock ........................209
Shoulder Belts ...........................39
Signals, Turn ...................139,188,413,415
Slippery Surfaces, Driving On ...............291
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) .................312
Snow Tires ............................313
Spare Tire ..........................307,354
Spark Plugs ............................379
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ..............144
Speedometer ...........................188
Starting ...............................275
Automatic Transmission .................276
Engine Fails to Start ....................277
Starting and Operating ....................275
Starting Procedures ......................275
Steering
Linkage .............................386
Power ...........................290,385
Shaft Seal ............................385
Tilt Column ..........................143
Wheel Lock ...........................14
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System
Controls ..............................249
Storage ............................175,410
Storage, Vehicle ......................268,410
Storing Your Vehicle ......................410
Sun Roof ..............................169
Sun Visor Extension .......................89
Sunglasses Storage .......................168
Sunroof Maintenance .....................172
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag ........50
Synthetic Engine Oil ......................378
452 INDEX
System, Navigation ......................244
Tachometer ............................191
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ........259
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant .......187,351
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint .............71,74
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo ...................177
Tilt Steering Column .....................143
Tire and Loading Information Placard .........299
Tire Identification Number (TIN) .............298
Tire Markings ..........................294
Tire Safety Information ....................294
Tires ............................80,303,434
Aging (Life of Tires) ....................309
Air Pressure ..........................303
Alignment ...........................311
Chains ..............................312
Changing ............................352
Compact Spare ........................307
General Information ....................303
High Speed ..........................306
Inflation Pressures .....................304
Jacking .............................352
Life of Tires ..........................309
Load Capacity .....................299,300
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ...........314
Quality Grading .......................434
Radial ..............................306
Replacement .........................310
Rotation .............................313
Safety ...........................294,303
Sizes ...............................296
Snow Tires ...........................313
Spare Tire ...........................354
Spinning ............................308
Tread Wear Indicators ...................309
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ..............341
Towing ...............................334
INDEX 453
10
Disabled Vehicle .......................363
Guide ..............................338
Recreational .......................348,365
Weight ..............................338
Traction Control ......................154,190
Traction Control Switch ...................154
Trailer Towing ..........................334
Cooling System Tips ....................348
Hitches .............................338
Minimum Requirements .................342
Trailer and Tongue Weight ................341
Wiring ..............................345
Trailer Towing Guide .....................338
Trailer Weight ..........................338
Transaxle
Automatic .........................12,278
Autostick ......................145,281,282
Overdrive ...........................281
Selection of Lubricant ................398,418
Transmission ...........................398
Automatic ...........................398
Filter ...............................400
Fluid ...............................398
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless
Entry) .................................24
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLinkt) . . 146
Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless
Entry) .................................24
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ........20
Transporting Pets ........................77
Tread Wear Indicators ....................309
Trip Odometer ..........................191
Trip Odometer Reset Button ................191
Turn Signals ...................139,188,413,415
UConnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) ..............89
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ................434
Universal Joints .........................386
454 INDEX
Universal Transmitter .....................146
Unleaded Gasoline .......................325
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ..............45
Upholstery Care ........................404
Vanity Mirrors ...........................89
Variance, Compass .......................207
Vehicle Certification Label .................331
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ............6
Vehicle Loading ...................300,331,333
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ..............7
Vehicle Storage .......................268,410
Video Entertainment System (Rear Seat Video
System) ...............................232
Warning Flasher, Hazard ..................350
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . 187
Warnings and Cautions .....................6
Warranty Information .....................431
Washer, Adding Fluid ..................142,387
Washers, Windshield .....................140
Washing Vehicle .........................402
Water
Driving Through ......................292
Wheel Alignment and Balance ...............311
Wheel and Wheel Trim ....................403
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care ................403
Wheel Bearings .........................401
Wheel Nut Torque .......................360
Wind Buffeting .......................34,171
Window Fogging ........................268
Windows ..............................32
Power ...............................32
Windshield Washers ...................140,387
Windshield Wiper Blades ..................387
Windshield Wipers .......................140
Wiper Blade Replacement ..................387
Wiper, Rear ............................141
INDEX 455
10
INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION HOW TO USE THIS MANUALWARNINGS AND CAUTIONS VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER VEHICLEMODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS THINGS TO KNOWBEFORE STARTINGYOUR VEHICLE AWORD ABOUTYOUR KEYS
Ignition Key RemovalKey-In-Ignition ReminderLocking Doors With The KeySTEERING WHEEL LOCK - IF EQUIPPED If You Wish To Manually Lock The Steering WheelTo Release The Steering Wheel LockAutomatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock SystemSENTRY KEY - IF
EQUIPPED Replacement KeysCustomer Key ProgrammingGeneral InformationSECURITY ALARM SYSTEM - IF EQUIPPED Rearming of the System - If EquippedTo Arm the SystemTo Disarm the SystemSecurity System Manual OverrideILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY To unlock the doors and liftgateTo lock the doors and liftgateTo Open/Close Power Liftgate - If EquippedFlash Lights On Lock/UnlockUsing The Panic AlarmProgramming AdditionalTransmittersBattery ReplacementDOOR LOCKS Manual Door
LocksPower Door LocksChild Protection Door LockWINDOWSPower WindowsLIFTGATE Power Liftgate - If EquippedOCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Lap/Shoulder BeltsLap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ProcedureSeatBelt PretensionersEnhanced Seat BeltUse Reminder System
(BeltAlert)Seat Belts and Pregnant WomenAutomatic-Locking Retractor (ALR)Seat Belts and Pregnant WomenSeat Belt ExtenderDriver and Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint System - AirbagEvent Data Recorder (EDR)Child RestraintENGINE BREAK-IN
RECOMMENDATIONS SAFETY TIPS Exhaust GasSafety Checks You Should Make Inside The VehiclePeriodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The VehicleUNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MIRRORS Inside Day / Night MirrorAutomatic
Dimming Mirror - If EquippedDrivers Side Outside Mirror Auto Dimmer - If EquippedExterior Mirrors Folding FeatureOutside Mirror - Drivers SideOutside Mirror - Passengers SidePower Remote-Control MirrorsHeated Remote Control Mirrors - If EquippedIlluminated Vanity
MirrorsHANDS-FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect) - IF EQUIPPED OperationsPhone Call FeaturesUConnect System FeaturesAdvanced Phone ConnectivityThingsYou Should KnowAbout Your UConnect SystemGeneral InformationSEATS 10-Way Drivers Power Seat
- If Equipped8-Way Drivers Power Seat - If Equipped4-Way Passengers Power SeatAdjustable Head RestraintsHeated Seats - If EquippedSecond Row Manual Seat Recliner - If EquippedSecond Row Manual Seat Adjuster - If EquippedSecond Row Bench Seating - If
EquippedSecond Row Fold and Tumble Seats - If EquippedThird Row Easy Exit - If EquippedThird Row Seating - If EquippedLoad Floor - If EquippedPlastic Grocery Bag RetainerDRIVER MEMORY SEAT - IF EQUIPPED Easy Exit Seat (Available with Memory Seat Only)
Tilt Mirrors in Reverse (Available with Memory Seat Only) - If EquippedTO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD LIGHTS Overhead Console Map/Reading LightsInterior LightsMulti-Function LeverHeadlights, Parking Lights, Instrument Panel LightsAutomatic HeadlightsDaytime
Running Lights (Canada Only)Lights-on ReminderHeadlight Time DelayFog Lights - If EquippedTurn SignalsHighbeam/Lowbeam Select SwitchPassing LightWINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS Windshield WashersMist FeatureWindshield Wiper OperationIntermittent
Wiper SystemRear Window Wiper/WasherTILT STEERING COLUMN ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL To ActivateTo Set a Desired SpeedTo DeactivateTo Resume SpeedTo Vary the Speed SettingTo Accelerate For PassingGARAGE DOOR OPENER - IF EQUIPPED
Programming HomeLinkCanadian Programming/Gate ProgrammingUsing HomeLinkReprogramming a Single HomeLink ButtonsSecurityTroubleshooting TipsGeneral InformationANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM -
ABS/TCS/BAS/ESP Traction Control System (TCS)Brake Assist System (BAS)ESP (Electronic Stability Program)ADJUSTABLE PEDALS - IF EQUIPPED REAR PARK SENSE SYSTEM - IF EQUIPPED Rear Park Assist SensorsRear Park Assist Warning Display
Enable/Disable the Rear ParkAssist System - IfEquippedService the Rear ParkAssist SystemCleaning the Rear Park Assist SystemREAR CAMERA- IF EQUIPPED OVERHEAD CONSOLE - IF EQUIPPED Courtesy/ReadingLightsSunglasses StoragePOWER SUNROOF
- IF EQUIPPED Express Open FeatureWind BuffetingSunroof Comfort Position - If EquippedSunroof MaintenanceELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS Electrical Outlet Use With Engine OffCUPHOLDERS Front Seat CupholdersSecond Row Seat CupholdersThird Row Seat
Cupholders - If EquippedSTORAGE Console FeaturesRear Cargo Storage Bin - If EquippedRetractable CargoArea Cover - If EquippedCargo Tie-Down HooksROOF LUGGAGE RACK -IF EQUIPPED LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM UNDERSTANDINGYOUR INSTRUMENT
PANEL INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS BASE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC) - IF EQUIPPED Oil Change RequiredCustomer
Programmable Features - IfEquippedCompass Display -If EquippedMini-Trip Functions - If EquippedSETTINGTHE ANALOG CLOCK ELECTRONIC DIGITAL CLOCK Clock SettingProcedureRADIO GENERAL INFORMATION RadioBroadcast SignalsTwo Types ofSignals
Electrical DisturbancesAM ReceptionFM ReceptionSALES CODE RAH - AM AND FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER AND CD/DVD CHANGER CONTROLS Radio OperationCD Player OperationCD/DVD Changer OperationNotes On Playing MP3 FilesOperation
Instructions - (CD Mode For MP3Audio Play)SALES CODE REV - AMAND FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER AND CD/DVD CHANGER CONTROLSRadio OperationCD Player OperationCD/DVD ChangerOperationNotes On Playing MP3FilesOperation Instructions
- (CD Mode For MP3 Audio Play)Operating Instructions - MP3 Player, Portable WalkmanOperating Instructions - Video Games/Camcorders6 DISC CD/DVD CHANGER (RDV) - IF EQUIPPED Operating Instructions - CD/DVD ChangerEJECT (EJT) ButtonOperating
Instructions - Remote ControlOperating Instructions - Video ScreenOperating Instructions - Headphones Operating Instructions - Auxiliary InputNAVIGATION SYSTEM - IF EQUIPPED SATELLITE RADIO - IF EQUIPPED System ActivationElectronic Serial Number/Sirius
Identification Number (ENS/SID)Selecting Satellite Mode in RBB, RAH, REV and RBK RadiosSelecting Satellite Mode in RBP, RBU, RAZ, RB1 and RBQ RadiosSelecting a ChannelStoring and Selecting Pre-Set ChannelsUsing the PTY (Program Type) Button (If Equipped)
PTY Button SCANPTY Button SEEKSatellite AntennaReception QualityREMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS Radio OperationCD PlayerCD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES CLIMATE CONTROLS Manual Air Conditioning
and Heating System Mode ControlManual Air Conditioning OperationDual-Zone Automatic Temperature ControlElectric Rear Window DefrosterSTARTING AND OPERATING STARTING PROCEDURES Automatic TransmissionNormal Starting (Above 32 degreesF/0
degrees C)Extremely Cold Weather Starting (Below -20 degrees F / -29 degrees C)High Altitude Starting(Above 4,000 ft. / 1 219 m)If Engine Fails To StartAfter StartingENGINE BLOCK HEATER - IF EQUIPPED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Brake/Transmission Interlock
SystemAutomatic Transmission Ignition Interlock SystemReset Mode - Electronic TransmissionAUTOSTICK AutoStick OperationAutoStick General InformationALL WHEEL DRIVE - IF EQUIPPED PARKING BRAKE BRAKE SYSTEM Anti-Lock Brake SystemPOWER
STEERING DRIVING ONSLIPPERY SURFACES AccelerationTractionDRIVING THROUGH WATER Flowing/RisingWaterShallow StandingWaterTIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire MarkingsTire Identification Number (TIN)Tire Loading andTirePressureTIRES -GENERAL
INFORMATION Tire PressureTire Inflation PressuresRadial-Ply TiresCompact Spare Tire - If EquippedLimited Use Spare - If EquippedTire SpinningTread Wear IndicatorsLife of TireReplacement TiresAlignment And BalanceTIRE CHAINS SNOW TIRES TIRE ROTATION
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM(TPMS) Basic TPMS withoutEVIC - IfEquippedBasic TPMS with EVIC- If EquippedPremiumTPMS - If EquippedTire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure WarningsService Tire System SoonGeneralInformationFUEL REQUIREMENTS
3.8L GASOLINE ENGINES4.0L GASOLINE ENGINESReformulated GasolineGasoline/Oxygenate BlendsMMT In GasolineMaterials Added to FuelFuel System CautionsCarbon Monoxide WarningsADDING FUEL Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
VEHICLE LOADING Vehicle Certification LabelGross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)OverloadingLoadingTRAILER TOWING Common Towing DefinitionsTrailer Hitch ClassificationTrailerTowing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
Trailer and Tongue WeightTowing RequirementsTowing TipsRECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE (Flat towing with all four wheels on the ground)WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HAZARD
WARNING FLASHER IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS JACKING ANDTIRE CHANGING Jack LocationSpare Tire StowagePreparations For JackingJacking InstructionsJUMP-STARTING PROCEDURE FREEINGA STUCK VEHICLE TOWING ADISABLED VEHICLE With
Ignition KeyWithout The Ignition KeyTOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE (Flat towing with all four wheels on the ground)TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE WITHA TOW DOLLYMAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 3.8LENGINES 4.0L
ENGINES ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM - OBDII Loose Fuel FillerCap MessageEMISSIONS INSPECTIONAND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS REPLACEMENTPARTS DEALER SERVICE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES Engine OilEngineOil FilterDrive BeltSpark
PlugsEngine Air Cleaner FilterCatalytic ConverterMaintenance-Free BatteryAir Conditioner MaintenancePower Steering - Fluid CheckFront and Rear Suspension Ball JointsSteering Shaft SealSteering LinkageDrive Shaft Universal JointsBody LubricationWindshield Wiper
BladesWindshield and Rear Window WashersExhaust SystemCooling SystemHoses And Vacuum/Vapor HarnessesBrakesMaster Cylinder - Brake Fluid Level CheckFuel System HosesAutomatic TransmissionAll Wheel Drive (AWD) - If EquippedFront And Rear Wheel
BearingsAppearance Care and Protection from CorrosionCleaning The Center Console Cup HoldersFUSES (INTEGRATED POWER MODULE) VEHICLE STORAGE REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS BULB REPLACEMENT HeadlightsHigh Intensity Discharge Headlights
(HID) - If EquippedFront Park/Turn Signal and Sidemarker LightsFront Fog LightRear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, Side Marker and Back-up LightsLicense LightFLUIDS AND CAPACITIES FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS EngineChassisMAINTENANCE
SCHEDULES EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE Required Maintenance IntervalsIF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment
Prepare A ListBe Reasonable With RequestsIF YOU NEEDASSISTANCE WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only) MOPAR PARTS REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In CanadaPUBLICATION ORDER FORMS DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES TreadwearTraction GradesTemperature GradesINDEX
